Elk Products | M1 | Installation manual | Elk Products M1 Installation manual

INSTALLATION
MANUAL
Cross Platform Control
TM
Specifications, Installation and Programming
M1 includes the SIA CP-01 Standards for False Alarm Reduction †
L520 Rev. J 11/11/10
Current with Firmware 5.2.x
Introduction
LIMITATION
The ELK-M1G Control is designed to warn against unauthorized entry and other situations. However, it is not a guarantee of protection against
the occurrence of burglary, fire, or other emergency. Any alarm system is subject to compromise or failure to warn for various reasons. For
example:
- Unauthorized access can be gained through unprotected points or by disarming or bypassing protected points.
- Sensing devices are power driven and do not operate without electrical power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with
dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any
reason, however briefly.
- Telephone lines over which alarm signals are transmitted may be out of service or rendered inoperable by an intruder.
- Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency
situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
- Smoke detectors have limitations and cannot detect all types of fires. According to data published by the Federal Emergency Management
Agency, while smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not activate or provide
early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, . Some of the reasons some detectors used in conjunction with this
System may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not sense
fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke
detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor
or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general,
detectors may not always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas,
improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending an the nature of the
fire, and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning to allow all
occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death..
- Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if the signal path
has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
- Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions. Longevity of
batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. External
factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all reduce the actual battery life in a given
installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to
maintain protection for that given point within the system.
- Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute for insurance.
Homeowner, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and
property.
- A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
- Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation manual. Passive
Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams of protection, and intrusion can only be detected
in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed
doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows. Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows
or any part of the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the
ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90 to 105F (32 to 40C), the detection performance can
decrease.
- Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the other side of
closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bedrooms, they are less likely to
waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a
stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic. Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearingimpaired people.
- This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to last as long as 20
years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
- The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This alarm
system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior written permission of the manufacturer. The material in this publication is for information
purposes and subject to change without notice. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this publication.
Printed in U.S.A.
Use of this control for fire detection and/or annunciation may not be permitted by certain states, counties, municipalities or local jurisdiction. It is
the responsibility of the installing alarm company to check with the local A.H.J. (Authority Having Jurisdiction) or State Fire Marshal’s office prior
to using this control for fire detection.
Page 2
M1G Installation and Programming
Table of Contents
Specifications, Features, and Benefits ..................................................................................................... 5
Wiring & Hookup Diagram ........................................................................................................................... 6
Section 1 - Installation and Wiring ............................................................................................................. 8
1.1 Planning the Installation ...................................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Parts Diagram & Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Mounting and Wiring Preparation ....................................................................................................... 8
1.4 Control Wiring .................................................................................................................................... 9
Data Bus E.O.L. Termination - VERY IMPORTANT! .............................................................................. 12
Section 2 - Operating the System ............................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 14
2.2 Powering Up (One Keypad) ............................................................................................................. 14
2.3 User Codes and Authorities .............................................................................................................. 14
2.4 Installer Program Code and Authorities ............................................................................................ 14
2.5 Keypad Overview ............................................................................................................................. 15
Keypad Menus ........................................................................................................................................ 16
Menu 0 - Select Keypad Alternate Area - Multi-area (Partition) Operation .............................................. 20
Section 3 - Programming The Control ..................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 21
3.2 Local Keypad Programming ............................................................................................................. 21
3.3 Local or Remote Computer Programming (ELK-RP) and Anti-Takeover ......................................... 21
3.4 Area Partitioning ................................................................................................................................ 21
3.5 Communicator Setup Checklist ....................................................................................................... 22
3.6 Entering Installer Level Programming ............................................................................................... 22
Menu 01 - Bus Module Enrollment .......................................................................................................... 24
Menu 02 - User Code Options ................................................................................................................ 25
Menu 03 - Area Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 26
Menu 04 - Keypad Definitions ................................................................................................................. 28
Menu 05 - Zone Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 30
Menu 06 - Alarm Duration Timers ........................................................................................................... 33
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions ..................................................................................................... 34
Menu 08 - Telephone Account Setup ...................................................................................................... 38
Menu 09 - Area Reporting Codes ........................................................................................................... 40
Menu 10 - Zone Reporting Codes ........................................................................................................... 42
Menu 11 - Keypad F-Key Reporting Codes ............................................................................................ 43
Menu 12 - Sys Report Code Options & Codes ...................................................................................... 44
Menu 13 - User Report Codes ................................................................................................................ 46
Menu 14 - Wireless Definitions ............................................................................................................... 47
Section 4 - PC Programming and Automation Capabilities .................................................................... 49
4.1 ELK-RP Software ............................................................................................................................ 49
4.2 Update/Verify Firmware in the Control and Peripherals ................................................................... 50
4.3 Automation Rules and Attributes ...................................................................................................... 51
Appendix A - Event Codes ........................................................................................................................ 58
Appendix B - Telephone Remote Control ............................................................................................... 60
Appendix C - Voice Message Vocabulary *RP only * ............................................................................. 62
Appendix D - Two Way “Listen-in/Talk” Interface ................................................................................... 64
Appendix E - SIA CP-01 Compliance ........................................................................................................ 65
Appendix F - Regulatory Agency Statements .......................................................................................... 66
Appendix G - Additional ELK-M1KP Keypad Information ...................................................................... 69
Index ............................................................................................................................. 71
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 3
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
1
Z1
N.O.
NEG
2
3
N.O.
Z2
Z3
N.O.
NEG
4
5
N.O.
Z4
Cross Platform Control TM
Control specifications subject to change without
notice. All circuits are power limited except for
Battery leads.
J3
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
7
Z7
N.O.
NEG
8
9
N.O.
Z8
Z9
N.O.
NEG
10
11
N.O.
Z10
Z11
N.O.
NEG
12
13
N.O.
Z12
Z13
N.O.
NEG
14
15
N.O.
Z14
Z15
N.O.
NEG
16
N.O.
Z16
JP1
2WIRE
SMOKE
TELCO SEIZED
DIALER ACTIVE
+SAUX
+12VDC Switched
Smoke Power
1.1 Amp PTC protected
+SAUX
NEG
+VAUX
See Note 1.
NEG
+VAUX
+12VDC Auxiliary
Power (3)
1.25 Amp PTC
protected
+VAUX
NEG
+VAUX
UL Listed Transformer,
Class 2, 16.5VAC, 45VA
Do not connect to a
switched outlet.
NEG
ELK-TRG1640
Power
ON
Status
Reverse
Bat Leads SW1
Jumper to start with
no AC - See Note 4.
Strip
AC
16.5 V
AC
BATTERY
+-
12V Battery
7 to 18 Ah
JP2
4-Wire Smoke Detector - Any Zone
N.O. Alarm
Contacts
To Zone Input
To Zone NEG
2200
+
+SAUX
+
Ohm
NEG
EOL
-
Serial Port ††
for Computer/ELKRP
See Manual
U.L. Listed EOL Supervision Relay, ESL #204A
or equiv. Use 2,200 Ohm EOL resistor, part #
ELK-ER2200. Set JP1 to 'Normal'.
2-Wire Smoke Detector - Zone 16 ONLY
820
Ohm
EOL
-
NEG
+
Select PLC Mode
1 WAY (PL513/PSC04)
2 WAY (TW523/PSC05)
J5
PLC ††
Lighting
Do Not
Interface
Conn. Connect to
a Phone
Line!
J-16 Programmable Outputs
See Note 1
1
+12V
& Note 2
NEG
OUT 16
OUT 15
OUT 14
OUT 13
OUT 12
OUT 11
OUT 10
OUT 9
OUT 8
OUT 7
To configure Zone 16 as a 2-wire smoke zone,
set Jumper JP1 to '2WIRE SMOKE' and use 820
Ohm EOL resistor, part # ELK-ER820
Use Only Compatible Detectors
Control Compatibility Identifier: M10001
Refer to the Wiring & Hookup Diagram in the
Installation Manual # L520 Rev. J for the 2-Wire
Smoke Detector Compatibility chart.
Notes
1. Refer to Appendix F located in the Installation
Manual #L520 Rev. J for UL limitations on total
continuous 'standby' current drain from terminals
+SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP, and J16.
2. OUT 1 †† for speaker(s) ONLY (4 to 8 Ohms).
If connecting more than 2, use series/parallel
wiring to avoid going below a 4 ohm total load.
OUT 2 Connect ONLY 1 UL Listed Bell or
Siren (self-contained). Current limited to 1 Amp.
Program Global Option 26 to Voltage. This
output supervised. Speaker(s) only permitted
for non-UL installations. Series/parallel wire to
avoid dropping below a 4 ohm total load.
OUT 3 NO/NC dry contact relay rated 4A.
OUT 7 through 16 are +12V switched positive
voltage outputs rated at 50mA max.
3. This terminal (formerly earth gnd) not used.
Do not connect any neg terminals to ground.
4. If AC fails, control will shut down if battery
drops below 10.2 Volts. To start the control with a
good battery and no AC, short the silver pads
momentarily. Replace Battery every 3-5 years.
Test regularly with ELK-BLT Battery Life Tester.
† Not Evaluated by UL
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
TEST SYSTEM WEEKLY
Complies with FCC Part 68:
Reg. # US: 5K6AL03BELK-M1 REN: 0.3B
Use Standard Jack: USOC RJ-31X.
Serial Number located below on base.
Complies with part 15 of FCC rules.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003
HA008E
ELK
PSC05 ††
or
Equivalent
Z16
PRODUCTS, INC.
HILDEBRAN, N.C., 28637, USA
OUT3 On LED
Dry Contact Relay
rated 4A @
12 - 24VDC
See Note 2
N/C
OUT 3
N.C. ZONE
J4
-
COM
N/O
+
OUT 2
2200
Ohm
EOL
Strip Wires to 1/4" Length
Z6
Aux Data Bus ††
for wireless receiver
i.e. GE-Caddx
C
+ NX408E, NX416E,
or NX448E
See Manual
B
A
1
Bell (Supervised)
-
See Note 2
+
OUT 1
6
TELCO
LINE
Green
TIP
NEG
N.O.
Red
RING
16 Zones expandable to 208
HOUSE
PHONES
Brown
T1
Z5
N.O.
ZONE 16
NORMAL
Page 4
ELK-M1
Grey
R1
RS232 CONN.
N.C. ZONE
Voice/Siren † †
-
See Note 2
Audio Network Interface ††
O
-
I
-
B A +
Data Bus Terminating Resistor
+VKP
DATA A
DATA B
NEG
RED
1
J7
JP3
2200
Ohm
EOL
1.25 Amp PTC
protected
GREEN
Keypad
WHITE
BLACK
Data Bus
See Note 1
Not Used -See Note 3
J2
Keypad &
Data Bus
J1
NEG
DATA B
DATA A
+12V
M1G Installation and Programming
Specifications, Features, and Benefits
General:
• Large zone capacity: 16 on-board zones expandable to 208
• Wireless capability † Up to 144 zones
• Two Way Listen-in interface †
• Flash Memory - Allows field updates to firmware electronically
• RS-232 serial port to interface PCs and peripheral devices
• Time/Date stamped 512 event history log
• Menu driven, text keypad programming - no manual required!
• Voice announcement of alarms, zone descs, status, etc.
- 500+ Word/Phrase Vocabulary
- Link up to 6 words/phrases per announcement
- 10 custom recordable words/phrases
• 13 On-Board Outputs: 1 voice driver/siren, 1 siren driver/
voltage, 1 form “C” Relay, and 10 low current (50 mA) voltage
outputs
• Supports 4 wire (any zone) and 2 wire (zone 16) smoke
detectors
• Includes Fire alarm verification routine
• Can be partitioned into 8 areas and account numbers
• User Codes: 99 (4 or 6 digit) with assignable authority levels
• Arm levels: Away, Stay, Stay Instant, Nite, Nite Instant, Vacation
• Plug-in terminal blocks make service and pre-wires a snap!
• Hardware "watchdog" and nonvolatile EEPROM memory
• Supervised phone line, alarm output, and aux. overcurrent
Communications
• True V.22 bis Modem for fast reliable upload/download
• Optional M1XEP Ethernet Interface † for user operation,
alarm reporting, programming, and more
• Built-in Phone Remote Control makes any phone a keypad
• Integrated Voice Dialer uses vocabulary or custom words
• Communicator formats: SIA, Contact ID, 4 + 2, and Pager
• Installer telephone (buttset) test feature
• Elk-RP PC programming software with conflict resolution to
easily highlight differences between control and PC
- Dial-up, ethernet, RS-232 port, or local house phone jack
- Automatic answering machine bypass
Keypad
• Backlit, Large Character LCD Display, 16 x 2 lines
• Built-in Temperature Sensor
• Optional Plug-in Prox Access reader (26 bit Weigand format)
• Menu navigation keys and 6 programmable function keys
• Plug-in connector, only 4 wires to the control
• 1 Zone input and 1 Output Programmable per Keypad
• Programmable display of time, date, & temperature
• Displays system diagnostics and settings.
• Maximum Keypads allowed: 16
Automation & Integration
• Create lifestyle enhancing comfort, convenience, and security
• Powerful “Whenever/And/Then” RULES Programming allows
almost any imaginable operation. No need to chain rules
together. Any single “Whenever” event can have one or more
ANDs and THENs (conditions and commands).
• Rules utilize easy to understand text based references
• Control lighting using RS-232 serial or 2-way Power Line
Control (PLC) Commands include On, Off, Dim, All On, All Off †
• Transmit and receive custom serial ASCII strings
• Read Temperature Sensors - Communicate with Thermostats
• Turn on Tasks, Lights, Outputs via Keypad or Telephone
• Sunset/Sunrise calculation and activation built-in
Power Supply
• Heavy duty - 2.5 Amp power supply
• Dynamic battery test
• Master power switch and Low battery disconnect
• PTC (fuseless) resettable overload protection
• Multiple auxiliary power terminals
Part Numbers and Accessories:
ELK-M1GCB
M1G Gold Board Only (No Teminals Blocks)
ELK-M1GOLD
M1G Gold - Control in 14” metal can
ELK-M1GK
M1G Gold Kit - No Metal Can, for use with
structured wiring systems
ELK-M1SYS4
M1G Gold Kit - 14” metal can, Ctrl, Encl, Xfmr,
KP, 12V-8Ah, Spkr, RJset
ELK-M1KP
Keypad, LCD,16 character x 2 line
ELK-M1KP2
Small LCD Keypad, 16 character x 2 line †
(no internal temp sensor and 2 less “F” keys)
ELK-M1KPAS
Keypad Arming Station †
ELK-M1XIN
16 Zone (input) expander
ELK-M1XOVR
16 Output expander, 8 Voltage/8 Relays
ELK-M1RB
Relay board, 8 form ”C” relays
ELK-M1DBH
Data bus wiring hub “Passive” †
ELK-M1DBHR
Data bus wiring hub “Active” for Retrofit †
ELK-M1XEP
Ethernet Port Exp/Interface †
ELK-M1XRF2G Wireless Receiver for GE Crystal Xmtrs †
ELK-M1XRF2H Wireless Receiver for Honeywell 5800 Xmtrs †
ELK-M1XSP
Lighting, Thermostat Interface & Serial exp. †
ELK-M1PR
Mini prox reader for keypad †
ELK-M1TWI
Two Way Listen-in Int. w/3 mic inputs †
ELK-M1TWS
Speaker & Mic for Two Way Listen-in †
ELK-M1ZTS
Zone Temperature Sensor -50 to 140 F †
ELK-RP
PC software - Free upon request with
Control Panel purchase
ELK-RM
Remote “User” Management software
NOTE: Use of Two Way Listen-in may be regulated by local or state laws and/or ordinance. It is the responsibility of the
Installer to check before using this feature.
Highlighted Features of the M1G (Gold)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automation (“Whenever/And/Then”) Rules Capacity
528
Serial (RS232) Port Supported
8 w/expanders
Phone Number Capacity
8
Number of HVAC Thermostats † Supported
16
Total Number of Outputs Supported
205
Advanced Lighting † Options (Pre-set Dim, Extended, Levels, Scenes) Yes
Analog Zone Definitions Supported
Yes
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
Page 5
Wiring & Hookup Diagram
(Left Side Terminals)
This unit provides Residential fire alarm service when installed according to ANSI/NFPA 72. Transmission
of the fire alarm signal to a fire alarm headquarters or central station shall be permitted only with the
approval of the authority having jurisdiction. The burglar alarm signal shall not be transmitted to a police
emergency number, equipment is to be installed in accordance with NFPA (985,55.1.P).
Recommended locations and wiring methods shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical
Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations; CAN/ULC-S302, Installation and Classification of
Burglar Alarm Systems for Financial and Commercial Premises, Safes and Vaults; and CAN/ULC-S301,
Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Systems.
Reference NFPA70 (NEC) & Canadian Electrical Code.
All circuits are current limited except for Battery leads. Refer to Appendix F.
For Installation of Residential Fire Warning Systems reference CAN/ULC-S540 Standard.
Testing of this system should be performed regularly with the primary AC power de-energized. Control
panel specifications are subject to change without notice.
Lithium 3V "Clock" battery, Varta #CR2032 located in upper left corner behind cover. Battery has a life
expectancy of approx. 10 years. Replace ONLY with exact model available at most electronics and camera
retailers. "CAUTION: Lithium Battery May Explode If Mistreated. Do Not Recharge, Disassemble, or
Dispose Of In Fire."
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. ZONE
1
2
N.O.
N.O.
3
N.O.
4
N.O.
5
6
N.O.
N.O.
7
N.O.
8
N.O.
Z1
NEG
Z2
Z3
NEG
Z4
Z5
NEG
Z6
Z7
NEG
Z8
NOTE: M1ZTS Temperature Sensors may only be connected to the first 16 zones.
Color Code for 2200
Ohm EOL Resistor
Part # ELK-ER2200
Gray (8)
Red (2)
Brown (1 x 0)
Gold (quality)
Color Code for 820
Ohm EOL Resistor
Part # ELK-ER820
Red (2)
Red (2)
Red (2 x 0)
Gold (quality)
2-Wire Smoke Detector Compatibility
Name
Model
System Sensor
2W-B, 2WT-B, 1151, 2100, 2100T, 2151
Sentrol (GE) † †
429AT, 521BXT, 521B
Compatibility ID
Max #
Base
A
20
None
S09A
20
None
To configure Zone 16 as a 2-wire smoke zone, set Jumper JP1 to "2 WIRE SMOKE" and use 820
Ohm EOL resistor, part # ELK-ER820.
Compatibility Identifier: M10001
Maximum Operating Voltage: 13.8 VDC
Max. wire resistance should not exceed 13 Ohms.
Use 18AWG Fire approved wire. Max. wire length = 1000 feet.
Do not mix different models on same circuit as proper operation
may be impaired.
Smoke Detector covers should be kept free
from dust and dirt by use of a dry or damp
(water) cloth as needed. When necessary,
2200
clean the detector interior and/or replace the Ohm
optical chamber according to instructions
EOL
provided by the Smoke Detector Manufacturer.
M1G "Board only" non-alarm
current draw = 140mA ( .14 Amp )
2-Wire Smoke Detector
820
Ohm
EOL
N.O. Alarm
Contacts
+
-
-
+
NEG
10
N.O.
N.O.
11
N.O.
12
N.O.
13
14
N.O.
N.O.
15
16
N.O.
N.O.
To Zone Input
To Zone NEG
2WIRE
SMOKE
JP1
TELCO SEIZED
DIALER ACTIVE
Switched +12 VDC Output
protected by 1.1A PTC.
U.L. Listed EOL Supervision Relay
(ESL #204 or Equivalent).
Auxiliary +12VDC Power Outputs protected by 1.25A PTC NOTE:
Refer to Appendix F for the UL limitations on total continuous 'standby'
current drain from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP, and J16.
16.5VAC, 45VA UL Listed Class 2 Transformer - ELK-TRG1640
DO NOT CONNECT TO A SWITCHED OUTLET
For Canada use cUL Listed Transformer - ATC Frost # FPS-4016
LEDS
Indicators
TELCO
SEIZED
DIALER
ACTIVE
Power
Normal
State
Descriptions
OFF
Phone line is good and house phones are connected. If ON constantly, the phone
line may be bad. During remote mode this LED will be ON since the house phones
are then disconnected from the outside line & are being powered from control.
OFF
Dialer/Modem is idle. If ON, Dialer/Modem is in use (communicating).
ON
AC Voltage is present and power switch is turned ON. If OFF, check AC power.
1 blink with equal On and Off times is Normal. 2 fast blinks = Control running on
bootloader only. 4 fast blinks = Control is re-initializing it's EEPROM memory after
a firmware flash. 5 fast blinks = Memory/Operation overflow
Status
Regular 1
sec. Blink
Battery
Reversed
OFF
Z9
NEG
Z10
Z11
NEG
Z12
Z13
NEG
Z14
Z15
NEG
Z16
ZONE 16
NORMAL
Z16
4-Wire Smoke Detector
+
9
18AWG Min.
+SAUX
NEG
+VAUX
NEG
+VAUX
NEG
+VAUX
NEG
AC
16.5 V
AC
POWER
STATUS
REVERSE
BAT LEADS
SW1
JUMPER TO START
WITH NO AC
BATTERY
+ -
Battery is connected correctly. If ON, check battery lead connections.
12 Volt
Sealed
Lead Acid
Control needs AC power to start. Momentarily shorting these two pads allows control to startup on battery only.
Master Power Switch (SW1), disconnects AC and Battery power from control.
Replace Battery every 3-5 years. Use ELK model # ELK1280 (12V - 8 Ah) or ELK12180 (12V - 18 Ah) or equivalent.
Page 6
M1G Installation and Programming
Demark
RJ31X JACK (ELK-RJSET)
J3
B
A
-
R1
T1
RING
TIP
J4
R1
R
1
Brown
Red
8
Green
Red
Aux Data Bus (J3) ††
For wireless receiver. Presently
works with ITI / Caddx NX408E,
NX416E, or NX448E. See
Programming Menu 14.
NEG
C
+ +12V
TELCO
LINE
Tip
Ring
Use 26AWG telco wire
1
PC
Personal Computer
(Windows Based)
1
Pin 2 < to > 2
Pin 3 < to > 3
1 WAY (PL513/PSC04)
2 WAY (TW523/PSC05)
PSC05 or
equiv.
+VAUX
NEG
OUT 16
OUT 15
OUT 14
OUT 13
OUT 12
OUT 11
OUT 10
OUT 9
OUT 8
OUT 7
OUTPUTS
End
view
Select PLC Mode (JP2)
Selects single or bi-directional
PLC Transmissions
Yellow
Green
Red
Black
Lighting Interface Conn. (J5) ††
Use Std. 4 conductor modular telephone
cable to connect to a powerline Interface
(PSC05, X-10 PLC or equiv.).
Do not connect to a live phone line!
(This connection not evaluated by UL)
J5
+12V (+VAUX)
NEG
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Pinout for Serial Port Cable (9 pin male to 9 pin female)
Maximum recommended length = 50 ft.
Serial Port (J4) ††
for Computer/ELKRP
(This connection not
evaluated by UL)
JP2
Lighting ††
Interface Conn.
Compiles with FCC Part 68
Reg. Number: US:5K6AL03BELK-M1
Ringer Equivalence REN: 0.3B
Use USOC RJ-31X connector.
Complies with the limits for class B computer
devices in accordance with the specifications of
subpart J of part 15 of FCC rules.
HOUSE
PHONES
Pin 5 < to > 5
RS232
PLC
JP2 Mode
1 WAY
2 WAY
J16
Yellow
5
T
T1
Green
4
(Right Side Terminals)
splices
Black
Grey
Red
Black
White
Green
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Violet
Grey
Pink
Tan
+12V
NEG
Yellow
Green
Red
Black
Close up view of std. 4 conductor modular phone cord. When
viewed as shown (back to back), the pin to pin color coding
does not reverse. Cord for PLC must be similar to above.
* See Auxiliary Current ratings
Relay Expansion Module (ELK-M1RB)
Optional module adds 8 general purpose
relays. Plugs into J16 connector.
Programmable Outputs (J16)
OUT 7 - 16 are +12V switched
positive general purpose
outputs rated at 50mA.
N/O COM N/C
N/C
Out 3 - Programmable General Purpose Relay
Rated at 4Amps @ 12 - 24VDC
(Dry Contacts)
COM
N/O
+
+
Bell (Supervised)
-
- + -
+
Voice/Siren †
-
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3
OUT3 LED
J7
Out 2 - Connect ONLY 1 UL Listed Bell or Siren (self-contained). For residential Fire the indicating
device shall be Wheelock 34T-12 or equiv. Current limited to 1 Amp. Program Global Option 26 to Voltage.
Speaker(s) are only permitted for non-UL installations and they must be series/parallel wired to avoid
dropping below a 4 ohm total load.
Out 2 is supervised. If not used, install a 2.2K Ohm
Out 1 - Voice/Siren ††
Speaker output only (Interior)
ELK-SP35 or equiv.
Audio Network Connection (J7) ††
For Two-Way Listen-in and Future Use!
Data Bus Devices e.g. Keypads, Expanders
AUDIO NETWORK INTERFACE
RS-485 Data Bus Max. length is 4000 ft. Total
RS-485 DATA BUS
GREEN
WHITE
-
NEG
DATA B
DATA A
+12V
DATA BUS
JP3
Terminating Jumper (JP3): See
important information about Data
Bus Termination.
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for
long distances.
DO NOT Jumper
Terminate these devices.
BLACK
Not Used
J1
Jumper
Terminate
these two
devices.
length of 2 homeruns must not exceed that distance.
RED
+VKP
DATA A
DATA B
NEG
J2
resistor to avoid Output 2 trouble condition.
NOTE: Do Not place a Direct Short Across OUTPUT 2.
A UL Listed Supplementary Power Supply may be required to meet the minimum standby
power supply requirements. Refer to the Chapter containing Regulatory Agency Statements.
DATA BUS TERMINATION IS VERY IMPORTANT!!
Diagram shows 2 basic (4-wire) home run cables with daisy chained devices on each. Last device on each cable
MUST have a Terminating Jumper installed. Jumpers are marked JP2 on keypads, JP1 on Expanders. Control
Hardware pack has two black jumpers for this purpose. Jumpers engage a 120 Ohm resistor across data A & B lines.
NOTE: If there is only 1 data bus cable, install JP3 Jumper on the Control.
WARNING! The RS485 Data Bus must NEVER have more that two (2) terminating jumpers installed.
NOTE: If you want to home run more than 2 cables, run 6 or 8 conductor cable so that the data lines A & B can have a
return path to series connect back out to the next device. This is best done with a ELK-M1DBH Data Bus Hub which
accepts Cat5 or Cat6 cable with RJ45 plugs. For more information see diagram in keypad instructions.
This terminal (formerly earth ground) is no longer used. Do not connect this or any neg. terminals to earth ground.
Temporary Connection "Plug-in" jacks for RS-485 Data Bus (J1 & J2)
Local connection for Data Bus Devices ie: Keypads, etc. for testing purposes only.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
Page 7
Section 1 - Installation and Wiring
1.1 Planning the Installation
The first step in any multi-zone security system installation is planning the job.
1. Read this entire manual to familiarize yourself with all system features and procedures before actually beginning the
installation. Read all the information regarding Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and NFPA requirements.
2. Perform a physical survey of the installation site. Use the diagrams below as a guide in planning the installation.
3. Discuss the installation requirements and applications with the customer.
4. Compare the installation requirements and applications with the factory default settings to determine what customized
programming is needed to meet the specific installation requirements.
5. Bench test the system prior to installation.
TYPICAL BURGLARY INSTALLATION LAYOUT
Bedroom 2
TYPICAL FIRE INSTALLATION LAYOUT
Bedroom 1
Bedroom 2
S
Kitchen / Dining
M
C
C
C
K
C
S
A
S
Bedroom 3
Living Room
C
Kitchen / Dining
M
A
Bedroom 3
Bedroom 1
S
Living Room
C
K
All perimeter openings below 18" should be provided with protection.
A Smoke Detector shall be located in each sleeping area and between
the sleeping areas and the main living area.
Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire
detection equipment in the location shown above.
M
A
S
C
K
Legend
- Main Control
- Audible Alarm
- Smoke Detector
- Contact
- Keypad
First Floor
In homes basements or multiple levels at least one smoke detector
shall be on each level.
Basement
1.2 Parts Diagram & Descriptions
See Wiring & Hookup Diagram on pages 6 & 7.
1.3 Mounting and Wiring Preparation
Control Mounting
DO NOT MOUNT THE CONTROL OUTDOORS OR IN A DAMP LOCATION OR WHERE THE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
ARE UNSUITABLE FOR ELECTRONIC BASED EQUIPMENT. DO NOT MOUNT IN AN UNCONDITIONED ATTIC. USE
COMMON SENSE AND GOOD INSTALLATION PRACTICES. A suitable location would be inside a secure dry location where
the ambient temperature inside the control box can remain at 32‘ to 120° Fahrenheit (0’ to +49' Celsius). Choose a location
that allows easy wiring to an unswitched power outlet and to a grounding conductor for the control. A central location makes
running system wiring easier. Remove control box knockouts that best suit your wiring needs.
After removing all packing materials, compare the system components with those in the figure above to familiarize yourself
with the part names. Mount the control using the upper center slotted hole to level. Install and connect all necessary wiring for
the power transformer, detection loops, keypads and siren outputs.
Keypad Mounting and Wiring
Ideal height is 50-58 inches. Pick a location with an ambient temperature range between 32° and 120° F (0° to +49° C). Avoid
direct sunlight if possible. Fasten backplate to electrical box or wall with flat head screws to prevent shorts to the back of the
circuit board. Keypads have an unpluggable harness for connecting to the M1data bus. Splice the Black, Red, White, and
Green wires from the unpluggable harness to the M1 Data Bus field cabling. Plug the connector into the back of the keypad.
Tuck wires neatly into back plate and install Keypad on mounting plate. The LCD keypads have connections for an optional
programmable output and a programmable zone input. NOTE: Min. field wire gauge is 24 AWG, but 18 to 22 AWG is better for
long distances. CAT5 (8 conductor) cable can be purchased in various wire gauge sizes. Where possible always use the
larger gauge CAT5 cable. The extra conductors in CAT5 wires can be used to provide return path for the data A & B lines.
Page 8
M1G Installation and Programming
Hookup Diagram for Keypad
Splice 6 Pin Keypad Wiring Assembly to the Data Bus cable using ELK-900-2 "B" Connectors.
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for long
distances.
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN
See Note about
Data Bus
Termination
ELK-M1KP
Keypad
Wiring
Assembly
Keypad 1
1
RED
BLUE
The optional Zone Input # or Output # is
determined by the Keypad Address.
6
BROWN
To Red (Pos) Wire
To Brown Wire
+
-
To BROWN Wire
Load (50mA max)
i.e. Relay, LED
To BLACK (Neg) Wire
+
-
Load (50mA max)
I.E. LED, Relay
Optional programmable Output from Keypad
NOTE: Early production M1KP Keypads provided a switched
negative (pull to ground) output. These units have the letter "E"
at the end of the ID number on the lower back side of the board.
Connect per diagram above. Boards marked PC096 with a letter
"F" or later provide the output as a switched positive.
To BLUE Wire
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C. N.O.
To BLACK (Neg) Wire
Optional programmable Zone Input from Keypad
KP
Zone Output
Address #
#
1
193 193
2
194 194
3
195 195
4
196 196
5
197 197
6
198 198
7
199 199
8
200 200
KP
Zone Output
Address #
#
9
201 201
10 202 202
11 203 203
12 204 204
13 205 205
14 206 206
15 207 207
16 208 208
NOTE: Refer to the section ‘Data Bus E.O.L. Termination’ for information on multiple homerun cables. NEVER SPLICE OR
CONNECT WIRE WITH CONTROL POWER ON. Minimum cabling should be four conductor 22 or 24 gauge. Maximum resistance per wire
is 25 Ohms. Device placement beyond 1000' is not recommended.
1.4 Control Wiring
Zone Inputs (1 thru 16 on main board, 17 thru 208 via expanders)
Zones are arranged in groups of 16, starting with Z1 thru Z16 on the main board. Each 2 zones share a common negative
terminal. A zone may be programming for EOL resistor supervision (Default), or normally closed/normally open without a
resistor. In addition, Burglar and Keyswitch zones may be programmed for EOL with Security Alert on Short, or EOL with
Security Alert on Open/Short, also referred to as a Four (4) State Zone (firmware 4.3.5 or later). If EOL resistors are used, they
should be placed at the furthest most remote end of the detection device wiring. EOL zones permit a combination of N.C.
(normally closed) or N.O. (normally open) devices. Using voltage meter probes across the zone and com terminals, a nonviolated EOL zone will measures approx. 7.0 VDC. An open circuit will be approx. 13.8 VDC. A shorted circuit will be 0
VDC. The Keypad also provides the ability “Menu 8 “System Diagnostics” to view zone voltage.
Traditional Three (3) State Zone Wiring (1 series resistor)
2200
Ohm
EOL
Zone Input
N.O.
Contact
N.C.
Alarm
Contact
Wire in Series with zone
input or use another zone.
N.C. Tamper
Contacts
Neg.
Alarm Contact
Condition When:
Diagostic Table
Zone
Resistance
Approx. Range
of Zone Voltage
A to D
Value
Armed
Disarmed
Short ~
2.2k Ohms
Open ~
0 - 3.9 Volts
4.0 - 8.8 Volts
8.9 - 13.8 Volts
0 - 72
73 - 170
171 - 255
Alarm
Alarm
Not Ready
Ready
Not Ready
N.C. Alarm
Contacts
2200 Ohm
EOL Resistor
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
Powered Motion, PIR, Glassbreak, etc.
Optional Four (4) State Zone Wiring (2 series resistors w/ N.C. contacts)
Tamper Contact
2200
Ohm
EOL
N.C.
N.C.
Alarm
Contact
2200 Ohm
Resistor
N.O.
Contact
Zone Input
Neg.
This feature
requires Firmware
2.3.5 or later.
M1G Installation and Programming
Zone
Input
2200 Ohm
EOL Resistor
Condition When:
A to D
Value
0 - 72
73 - 159
160 - 220
221 - 255
Program Zone for EOL Wiring
Type 4 - Supervisory on Open
N.C. Tamper
Contacts
Fig 1: N.C. Alarm Contact
(Unpowered) with N.C. Tamper
Diagnostic Table
Zone
Approx. Zone
Resistance Voltage Reading
Short ~
0 - 3.9 Volts
2.2k Ohms
4.0 - 7.3 Volts
4.4k Ohms
7.4 - 11 Volts
Open ~
11.1 - 13.8 Volts
Zone
Input
Armed
Disarmed
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Sec. Alert/Tamper
Ready
Not Ready
Sec. Alert/Tamper
N.C. Alarm
Contacts
2200 Ohm
Resistor
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
Fig 2: Powered PIR, Glassbreak, etc. with Tamper
Page 9
Two-Wire Smoke Zones (Zone 16)
To enable use of two-wire smoke detectors on Zone 16, position Jumper JP1 (located below Zone 16 terminals) so that the
two right hand pins are covered. Go to Installer programming mode, Menu 05 - Zone Definitions, and program Zone 16 as a
Fire zone (Def=10). Step to next location and program Wire Type=6. NOTE Use only compatible two-wire detectors listed on
the front label of the control. Do not mix brands. The maximum number of detectors is also listed on the front label. For
two-wire operation, a 820 Ohm EOL resistor part # ER820 must be used instead of the 2,200 Ohm resistor part # ER2200.
Use 18AWG Fire approved wire. Max. wire length = 1000 feet. Max. wire resistance should not exceed 13 Ohms.
Switched Power Connection (+SAUX)
Four-wire smoke detector and other devices that require a temporary power disruption in order to reset or unlatch from the
alarm state (i.e. smoke detectors, etc.) should be connected to the +SAUX 12 Volt DC switched power terminal. When a
smoke reset is performed, the operating voltage to these devices is momentarily interrupted.
Auxiliary Power Connections (+VAUX)
Motion detectors, glass breaks, etc. and other devices requiring unswitched 24-hour power should be connected to one of the
auxiliary terminals, +VAUX. All negative terminals on the terminal strip are at the same reference and may be used whenever
a common (circuit ground) negative is required. Use caution when wiring the control to distribute the load devices among the
supply and the negative terminals evenly. NOTE: Circuit ground refers to any negative terminal connection on this control.
This does not refer to the earth ground terminal or to the common terminals of Relay Output 3. These terminals are not at
the same voltage potential and should not be wired so that they are electrically connected to a negative.
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Circuit Breakers
The +VAUX Auxiliary power and J16 power output terminals are protected against shorts and overloads by a 1.25A PTC. A PTC
is a solid state, auto-restoring type of circuit breaker. The +SAUX Switched (Smoke) power output is protected by a 1.1A PTC.
The +VKP Keypad power output is protected by a 1.25A PTC. Output 2 is protected by a 1.25A PTC. NOTE: Sometimes it may
be necessary to remove power (unplug the outputs) for approx. 20 seconds after a short, to allow the PTC to reset. Even
if the short is no longer present, the remaining residual current draw may be so high that the PTC cannot determine that
the short is gone. If the PTC re-trips, check the field wiring and repair.
Transformer Primary Power Input (AC)
The control is powered by a 16.5 VAC, 40 min. VA, UL Listed Class 2 transformer (ELK-TRG1640). The specified sized and
rated transformer must be used to operate this control. The transformer must be connected to a 120 VAC, 24-hour outlet not
controlled by a switch other than an approved overcurrent protection device.
UL Listed Transformer,
Class 2, 16.5VAC, 45VA
EL K
-TR
G1 6
40
+VAUX
NEG
AC
16.5 V
AC
POWER
STATUS
REVERSE
BAT LEADS
SW1
JUMPER TO START
WITH NO AC
+
BATTERY
+
RED
BLK
-
12V Battery
5 to 18Ah
Sealed Lead Acid
Connect the transformer to the AC Terminals using 16 to 18 gauge minimun wire. Do not exceed 50 feet between the
transformer and the control or run the AC power in a multiconductor with other system circuits. Leave the transformer
unplugged as well as the standby battery until all other connections have been made.
Standby Battery Connection
Connect the BLACK wire to the Neg (-) terminal on the battery, the connect the RED wire to the Pos (+) terminal on the battery.
The control is designed to operate with and recharge a 12 volt, sealed lead acid battery from 7Ah up to 18 Ah for backup of the
primary power supply. The control maintains a float charge for the battery of 13.8 VDC at 100 mA. This is in addition to the
continuous output of 1.5 Amps that the power supply maintains (see maximum current drains for UL Listed Systems).
CAUTION: Do not reverse the battery leads! The control has special circuitry which helps protect it from battery reversal
damage for short durations. However, prolonged reversal of the battery leads may cause permanent damage. A reverse
battery warning LED is located to the left of the power On/Off switch. If this light is ON, turn the power off immediately
and correct the battery lead connections.
Page 10
M1G Installation and Programming
AC Failure, Low Battery, and Automatic Low Voltage Shutdown
During an AC power failure the battery automatically takes over and AC Fail trouble annunciates at the keypad. The
communicator can be programmed to report AC Fail to the Central Station after a time delay (see Menu 12, System Option 01).
If the battery voltage falls below 11.2 VDC a Low Battery Trouble condition will occur. The communicator can be programmed
to report Low Battery to the Central Station. The battery will continue to run the control until its voltage drops below 10.2 VDC,
at which time the control will disconnect and shut down to prevent a false alarm and damage to the battery. The AC Fail
trouble display will clear if the AC restores. However, the Low Battery Trouble requires a manual or automatic battery load test
before it will clear. An automatic battery load test is performed every 24 hours. See Section 2.2 for powering up the control.
Telephone Line Connection (R1,T1,T,R)
The telephone interface is connected by the use of an approved RJ-31X interconnect jack. This device allows the subscriber
to disconnect the control/communicator from the public switched telephone network in the event of a malfunction. The control
is equipped with line seizure so that the premises telephone service is interrupted during communication to the central
station. Connection to the approved jack is done with a RJSET cord which connects the control terminals to the RJ31X jack.
NOTE: The Telco cord can be supervised to the RJ31X or demarc block by installing an EOL resistor across the Orange and
Blue wires (RJ31X terminals 2 and 7). In the control, connect the Orange and Blue leads to any 24hr Burglar zone input.
Outputs
There are 13 outputs on the main board. Outputs may be expanded utilizing output expander boards connected to the RS-485
4-wire Keypad data bus. Outputs 1 & 2 trip when any alarm is activated. All others must be enabled through the RP Rules
Programming and can be triggered by multiple conditions “events”. Do not exceed the current limits on voltage only outputs.
Output 1 †† is for speakers(s) ONLY (4 to 8 Ohms). If connecting more than 2, use series/parallel wiring to avoid going
below a 4 ohm total load. This output is the source for voice announcements such as: Zone 1 not ready, System Armed, Alarm
Activated, etc., as well as alarm siren sounds. The initial start volume and the final volume can be adjusted in programming
to suit the application.
Output 2 - Connect a UL Listed Bell or Siren (self-contained). Current limited to 1 Amp. Program Global Option 26 to Voltage.
This output is supervised. Speaker(s) are only permitted for non-UL installations. Series/parallel wire to avoid dropping
below a 4 ohm total load.
Output 3 is a Single Pole Double Throw Relay with form “C” contacts (Com, N/O, and N/C).
Outputs 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 are low current, positive (+) voltage only, for driving LEDs, relays, etc. Outputs 4,
5, and 6 ARE NOT available from the main board. They can only be accessed with a data bus Output expander set to
address 1. This expander will replicate main board outputs 7 thru 16, while also including outputs 4, 5, and 6.
Programmable Outputs (J16) OUT 7 - 16 are +12V switched
positive general purpose outputs rated at 50mA.
ELK-924 †
+T -T NEG POS
N/C COM N/O N/C COM N/O
+12V Red
Black
White
Green
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Violet
Grey
Pink
Tan
24V OPEN
+VAUX
NEG
OUT 16
OUT 15
OUT 14
OUT 13
OUT 12
OUT 11
OUT 10
OUT 9
OUT 8
OUT 7
D3
+12V
NEG
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
OUTPUTS
J16
Door
Strike †
+
-
24V AC
Transformer
Using Output 7 (low current) with a sensitive relay to switch 24V AC to a Door Strike †
Earth Grounding
Tests have determined that the best results against lightning and transients are obtained by isolating the control from ground.
Do NOT connect any of the terminals, especially the Neg. terminals to earth ground. Early production boards had an earth
ground terminal. This terminal is no longer used on circuit board revision I or later. However, ancilliary devices such as the
ELK-950 Surge Protector on the incoming Telephone circuit are still recommended.
Keypad & Expanders on the RS-485 Data Bus (+VKP, Data A, Data B, Neg)
Keypads and data bus expander devices connect to the four terminals marked +VKP, Data A, Data B, and Neg. The keypad
plug-in wire harness color code is: Red +VKP, Green Data A, White Data B, and Black (-) Neg. The +VKP power terminal is
protected by an auto reset PTC device. In the event of a short circuit or malfunction, power will be removed from all devices
until the problem is resolved. Two (2) quick connect header pin plugs (J1 and J2) along the bottom of the board may be used
for temporary purposes I.E. bench testing using a four conductor ribbon cable. Do not use for permanent connections.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
Page 11
Data Bus E.O.L. Termination - VERY IMPORTANT!
The M1 data bus comforms to EIA RS-485 standards and operates at 38,400 bits per second. The RS-485 standard stipulates there be no
more than 2 home run data bus cables attached to the M1 Main Data terminals, with the end of each cable terminated by a 120 Ohm resistor
connected across the data wires. The M1 board and bus devices come with built-in terminating resistors that may be activated via 2 pin
jumpers (2 Gold Pins). Placing a shorting cap (included in hardware pack) on the two gold pins activates the 120 Ohm terminating resistor
across Data Lines A & B. These jumpers are marked JP2 on the keypads and JP1 on the expanders. From the factory, no terminating
resistors are installed. Without proper termination, noise and interference can cause data corruption and missed communications.
WARNING! Do not splice or interconnect the M1 Data Bus using Telephone type 66 or 110 punch down blocks.
The RS-485 Data Bus must NEVER have more than 2 terminating resistors header/jumpers installed.
RS-485 DATA BUS
NOTE: RS-485 Data Bus Max. wire length is 4000 ft. Total
length of 2 homeruns must not exceed that distance.
+VKP
RED
DATA A
GREEN
DATA B
WHITE
NEG
BLACK
Data Bus Devices
e.g. Keypads, Expanders
Keypad 1
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for
long distances.
DO NOT Jumper
Terminate these devices.
Jumper
Terminate
these two
devices.
Keypad 3
The last device on each home run cable SHOULD be terminated via the gold 2 pin terminating header/jumper. Placing a shorting cap on the pins will engage a 120 Ohm
resistor across data lines A & B. If there is only 1 data bus home run cable then place shorting cap on JP3 of Main Board. See other hookups below.
Diagram of Two (2) Home Run Cables with Devices Daisy Chained along the Data Bus
NOTE: RS-485 Data Bus Max. wire length is 4000 ft. Total. Each CAT5 homerun from
the M1DBH must be calculated as double the running distance since the Data A & B
lines travel out and then back (A1 & B1) where they are used to feed the next homerun.
Mount M1DBH inside control.
Use 4 conductor cable to connect
to the M1 Data Bus terminals.
ELK-M1DBH Data Bus Hub †
+ VKP
J4
J2
J6
J8
Front
view
DATA A
DATA B
NEG
J1
J3
J5
J7
J9
RS-485 DATA BUS
Pin1
8 - Brown
7 - Wht/Brn
6 - Orange
5 - Wht/Blue
4 - Blue
3 - Wht/Org
2 - Green
1 - Wht/Grn
Blue pair is
unused
CAT5
or
CAT6
Cable
Pin1
RJ45 Plug
Wht/Blue
Blue
+
-
BLACK (-)
Orange
A
GREEN
Green
A1
WHITE
Wht/Org
B
Wht/Grn
B1
Keypad
Keypad
RED +12V
Keypad
BLUE
To
Black (-)
TO CONTROL
COLOR CODE EIA 568A for CAT5/6 Data Bus Cable to RJ45 Plugs.
CAT5 Cables
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for
long distances.
Wht/Brn
Brown
BROWN
To BLACK (Neg)
+
-
Load (50mA max)
I.E. LED, Relay
Optional programmable Output
RJ45 Terminating Plug Insert in first unused jack and terminate the control
at JP3. DO NOT TERMINATE AT ANY OF THE DEVICES!
The ELK-M1DBH † Data Bus Hub is great for new installations where it is possible run multiple CAT5 homerun cables. The RJ45
jacks allow neat and organized connections and a third wire pair is used to return the DATA lines back from each device where they
are used to feed the next adjacent jack. The M1DBH circuitry daisy chains the devices by series connecting the DATA lines A & B.
Termination is accomplished with a plug-in RJ45 terminator (supplied).
N.O.
N.C.
To BLACK (Neg)
2200
Ohm
EOL
Optional programmable Zone Input
Refer to Keypad Instructions
for more info about Output and Zone Input
OPTION A - Using an optional ELK-M1DBH and CAT5 Cables to Daisy Chain Devices
NOTE: RS-485 Data Bus Max. wire distance is 4000' total. Each homerun 6 conductor
cable must be calculated as double the running distance since the Data A & B lines
travel out and then back (A1 & B1) where they are used to feed the next homerun.
+VKP
RED
DATA A
GREEN
DATA B
WHITE
NEG
BLACK
To 12VDC
To 12VDC
DATA
A1 A
DATA
A1 A
B1
B1
A
A1
B
B1
6 Wire
Cable
TO CONTROL
RED +12
BLACK (-)
GREEN
Keypad
WHITE
BLUE
RS-485 DATA BUS
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for
long distances.
+
-
Keypad
B
6 conductor cable
B
Keypad
BROWN
Install Teminating
Jumper on this last
device AND on the
control JP3.
Optional Output and Zone Input - See Keypad Instructions
Connect each device to the 6 conductor cable as shown above
Another option for wiring multiple home runs is to use 6 conductor cabling. This allows devices to be daisy chained using an out and back configuration. This involves a 3
way splice of the data A (Green)wire to 2 wires of the 6 conductor cable (designated A and A1). Same is done for data B (White) wire. At the control wires A1 and B1 get
spliced to the A and B wires feeding the next device. Terminate the last wired device and the control JP3 ONLY! The POS (+) and Neg (-) power wires should be parallel
wired to the +VKP and Neg terminals or to an auxiliary Power Supply if the combined current draw exceeds the rated current available from the Control.
OPTION B - Using 6 Conductor Cables and Series Splices to Daisy Chain Connection of Data Bus Devices
To Keypads or Expanders
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 12
AUXILIARY POWER
SUPPLY
-
RED
+
WHITE
-
BLACK
B
WHITE
A
GREEN
UL Use a UL Listed, battery backed-up Power Supply for UL installations. The battery
will be supplying power to the Keypads/Expanders during a power outage. The Power
Supply and backup Battery should be sized to supply the Keypads/Expanders with the UL
required minimum standby time.
RED
+
BLACK
DATA BUS TERMINALS
GREEN
††† An Auxiliary Power Supply will be required if the control's Aux. power load for all
combined loads exceeds 1A. (450 mA for UL Commercial). Connect as shown below.
Be sure to connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the negative (-)
terminal (Data Bus NEG) on the control.
To Keypads or Expanders
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
M1G Installation and Programming
The ELK-M1DBHR † Data Bus Hub Retrofit is intended for retrofit jobs where existing 4 conductor cables are the only wires available. It creates 4 managed RS-485
BRANCHES from the single M1 main RS-485 Bus. Like the main M1 Bus, each branch can only have 2 home run cables (4 branches x 2 ea. = 8 home runs). DO
NOT connect more than 2 M1DBHRs to an M1. DO NOT connect an M1DBHR on a branch of another M1DBHR! The M1DBHR CANNOT be used as an extender or
a remote repeater. DO NOT remote M1DBHR(s) away from the M1. Mount close to the main M1 Control. Terminate the last (end of line) device on each home run.
ELK-M1DBHR †
DATA BUS HUB FOR RETROFIT
RED
WHITE
A
BLACK
B
-
DO NOT attach more than two (2)
M1DBHR Hubs to a single M1 Control.
INPUT
FROM CONTROL
GREEN
Terminating Jumpers (JP1 - JP5)
JP1 = Terminates Input from Control
JP2 = Terminates Branch 1
JP3 = Terminates Branch 2
JP4 = Terminates Branch 3
JP5 = Terminates Branch 4
See details about Data Bus Termination.
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP5
JP4
-
+
A
B
-
WHITE
B
DATA BUS
BRANCH 4
BLACK
A
RED
RED
GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
Keypad
+
GREEN
-
WHITE
B
DATA BUS
BRANCH 3
BLACK
A
RED
Keypad
Bus Termination:
If using 1 M1DBHR place jumper on JP1 of
the M1DBHR and JP3 of the M1 Control.
With 2 M1DBHR boards place jumper on
JP1 of both M1DBHR boards and remove
jumper JP3 on the M1 Control.
DO NOT EXCEED two (2) terminating
jumpers on any of the 4 branches of the
M1DBHR or the main M1 bus.
Example #4
Branch 4 empty (not used)
Place terminating jumper JP5 of M1DBHR.
-
††† An Auxiliary Power Supply will be required if the control's Aux.
power load for all combined loads exceeds 1A. (450 mA for UL
Commercial). Connect as shown below. Be sure to connect the
negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the negative (-) terminal
(Data Bus NEG) on the control.
UL Use a UL Listed, battery backed-up Power Supply for UL
installations. The battery will be supplying power to the Keypads/
Expanders during a power outage. The Power Supply and backup
Battery should be sized to supply the Keypads/Expanders with the
UL required minimum standby time.
DO NOT Jumper JP3.
DATA BUS TERMINALS
Keypad
+
A
B
-
Keypad
AUXILIARY POWER
SUPPLY
-
+
OPTION C - Using an optional M1DBHR Active Data Bus Hub
To Keypads or Expanders
RED
WHITE
DO NOT Jumper Terminate
these devices.
BLACK
DO NOT Jumper JP4.
Keypad
GREEN
The max. number of bus devices
varies based on the types and
models being used or combined.
Jumper
Terminate
these two
devices.
Keypad
B
WHITE
Example #3
Three (3) Keypads & 2 Expanders on Branch 3
(Devices must be Daisy chain wired on each
homerun so they appear to be in series.)
Place terminating jumper on the LAST
device connected to each homerun and
remove jumper JP4 on M1DBHR.
Jumper
Terminate
these two
devices.
A
RED
Example #2
Two (2) Keypads on Branch 2
Place terminating jumper on BOTH Keypads
and remove jumper JP3 on M1DBHR.
+
GREEN
Example #1
A single Keypad on Branch 1
Place terminating jumper on the
Keypad/Bus Device AND on JP2 of
the M1DBHR.
+
DATA BUS
BRANCH 2
GREEN
DATA BUS
BRANCH 1
Jumper Terminate
this device AND JP2
on the M1DBHR.
Min. wire gauge: 24 AWG
18 to 22 AWG is best for long distances.
ELK PRODUCTS, INC.
Mount M1DBHR(s) in same enclosure with the
M1 Main Board. Connect to the M1 Data Bus
terminals using a short 4 conductor cable.
DO NOT attempt to remotely mount an
M1DBHR or use as a remote bus extender!
Like the Main M1 Bus, the Maximum wire
length of any of the 4 branches on the
M1DBHR is 4000 ft.
HILDEBRAN, N.C., 28637, USA
+VKP is protected with 1.25A PTC
+
+VKP
DATA A
DATA B
NEG
BLACK
RS-485 DATA BUS
To Keypads or Expanders
Setting the Data Bus Address and Enrolling Device(s) into the System
Keypads and Expanders communicate over the RS-485 data bus. Each device must have a unique address setting (1 to 16)
within it's device type. Keypads are TYPE 1, input (zone) expanders TYPE 2, output expanders TYPE 3, etc. Device types permit
address numbers to be re-used on different device type. For example: a Keypad, Zone Expander, and Output Expander can
each be set to address 2 on the same data bus because each device is a different device type. But duplicate addresses
CANNOT exist within the same device type. I.E. Multiple keypads on the same bus cannot be set to 'like' addresses.
ADDRESS: From the factory all keypads are set to address 1. Valid addresses are 1 to 16. The first keypad on the system
(Keypad 1) is automatically enrolled upon power up. Each additional keypad must be assigned a unique address and then
manually enrolled from “Menu 1 - Bus Module Enrollment”. (See Menu 01, for complete instructions on Bus Module Enrollment)
1. Enter Keypad setup by one of the following three (3) methods:
a. Press and hold the " * " key for approx. 10-12 seconds (KP1 Keypads with firmware 2.1.48 or later)
b. Press the “ * ” and F5 keys at the same time for approx. 10 seconds. (older KP1 Keypads)
c. Hold ANY key pressed while applying power.
Keypad is in setup mode when the display indicates: Exit when done. F1 Set Addr.
2. Press the F1 key to display the current address setting.
3. Set the desired address by entering a number from 1 to X.
4. Press the Exit key when done.
ENROLLING:
1. Press the ELK key, then 9 (or scroll up) to display 9 - Installation Programming. Press the RIGHT
arrow key to select this menu. The Installer Program Code must be entered to access this menu.
2. Enter the Installer Program Code. (The default code is 172839)
3. The first Installer Programming menu display will be “Bus Module Enrollment”
4. Press the RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. “Enrolling Bus Modules” will display.
5. After a few seconds the display will show the total Bus Modules that are enrolled. To view the
enrolled devices and /or remove a device press the RIGHT arrow key next to the word Edit.
6. Press the * or Exit keys to exit Installer Programming.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
Auth. Required
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
Enter Valid Pin
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
01-Bus Module
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
Enrollment
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
XX Bus Modules
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
Enrolled, Edit r
1234567890123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345
Page 13
Section 2 - Operating the System
2.1 Introduction
The control has factory default programming which make it easy to bench test prior to installation. Terminate all zones with
EOL resistors, then connect a keypad, transformer, and battery. The factory (Master) user code is 3456. This code can
operate all user related features of the system. This section gives an overview of powering up and basic keypad functioning.
2.2 Powering Up (One Keypad)
After all other connections have been made and checked thoroughly, the controls AC transformer and battery may be
connected. The Master Power Switch located on the lower left corner can then be turned. Upon power up the control will
perform self-diagnostics and auto-enroll the first keypad (Keypad Address #1). Any additional keypads or expanders must be
manually enrolled using Installer Level Programming. See “Menu 01 - Bus Module Enrollment”.
NOTE: It is very important to make certain that every keypad, input expander, output expander, or any other data bus
device be assigned a unique data bus address within its type. See “MENU 01 - Bus Module Enrollment” for instructions
on setting keypad and expander addresses.
System Startup on Battery Only (Ordinarily the control will not startup without AC power)
If AC power is not available (new construction site, etc.) the control may be started on battery ONLY by shorting the two silver
pads (located in the lower left corner of the circuit board) with a small blade screwdriver. This will temporarily bypass the AC
sensing circuit and allow the control to startup. NOTE: The On/Off power switch must be in the On position.
2.3 User Codes and Authorities
The control has 199 user codes plus one installer code. Each user code may be assigned specific authorities as to what it is
allowed to do. The authorities are assigned from the Installer level programming, however the code digits and user names
are assigned from the keypad user menu 6 - Change User Codes. Only a Master authority level code or the Installer code is
allowed to access keypad user menu 6. The User’s Guide contains a description of operations accessible to the user codes.
Control operations accessed by the installer passcode are slightly different.
Factory Default for User Code 1 is: 3 4 5 6 (Master Code) (1 2 3 4 5 6 if the six digit code option is enabled)
User code may be used for functions in a specific area or system-wide. Some options may be performed at any time, even
while the control is fully or partially armed. The menu system is designed to be next-step-oriented. After a brief explanation of
the options, the user should be able to begin operating the system immediately. For purposes of discussion, the installer and
the end consumer are both considered users, but have different capabilities.
2.4 Installer Program Code and Authorities
The installer code can access all the keypad user menus and has limited arm/disarm privileges. It may be used to arm any
area and disarm any area as long as the area WAS NOT armed by a user code. The Installer code can silence 24hr alarms
or a Burglary alarms in an area that was armed by the installer or in an area that is not armed. The installer code can silence
a trouble condition in a disarmed area. See User’s Guide for a full description of arming and disarming procedures.
Factory Default for the Installer Program Code is: 1 7 2 8 3 9
WARNING! Do Not use 0 0 0 0 0 0 for the Installer Program Code.
This will cause complete lockout of Keypad Installer Level Programming.
Page 14
M1G Installation and Programming
2.5 Keypad Overview
Ready Light - ON when all burglar zones are secure and the system is OK to arm. If OFF, one or more zones are violated (not secure). For
maximum security, secure all zones before arming the system. If FLASHING, one or more force-armable zones are violated. Force arming
temporarily excludes violated zone(s) from the system. If a force armed zone becomes secure while system is armed, it will automatically
restore to service. This is handy for a garage door as system may be armed with the door up, but will secure when door closes.
Armed Light- ON when the system is armed. The mode of arm will be indicated by the LCD display and the Exit or Stay lighted pushbuttons.
This light will be OFF when the system is disarmed.
Exit Key - May be programmed for single or double press arming to the AWAY (not occupied) mode. If ON the system is armed and all
perimeter sensors and interior motions are active. The Away key may be pressed during the exit delay time t to convert from Away to Away
Vacation mode. Vacation mode is primarily for use with the Whenever/And/Then Rules programming of Elk-RP for long term energy savings.
Stay Key - May be programmed for single or double press arming to the STAY (occupied) mode. If ON the system is armed and all interior
zones are excluded (bypassed). Only perimeter doors and windows are active in the Stay mode. This key may also be programmed to
change to other Stay modes such as: Stay Instant, Stay Night, and Stay Night Instant. Since interior zones are automatically excluded once
the Stay mode is activated, the M1 allows this key to Stay arm even while one or more interior zones are violated, provided they are programmed for “force arming”. The Stay Night mode re-activates any interior night zones. To prevent a false alarm the control will not allow
change to the Stay Night mode when a interior night zone is violated unless it is programmed for “Force arm”.
Available Keypads Styles
ELK-M1KPAS Arming Station
Fits a single gang electrical box.
ELK-M1KP2 LCD Keypad
Smaller than M1KP.
Features and/or operational characteristics will vary by keypad style.
ELK-M1KP LCD Keypad
Keypad Models and Feature Comparison
PART
NUMBER
PHYSICAL
DIMENSIONS
DOOR
COVER
ZONE
INPUT
PROG.
OUTPUT
OPT. 26 BIT
PROX READER
TEMP
SENSOR
FUNCTION
KEYS
BACKLIGHTING
LCD
KEYS
ELKM1KP
6.87" W x 5.25" H x 1.32" D
Yes
Yes (1)
Yes (1)
Yes - Int. or Ext.
Yes
(6) F1 thru F6
Green
ELKM1KP2
4.65" W x 5.5" H x .95" D
No
Yes (1)
Yes (1)
Yes - Ext. Only
No
(4) F1 thru F4
1.3" W x 2.62" H x .3" D
No
No
No
No
No
(6) F then 1- 6
ELKM1KPAS
MOUNTING
OPTIONS
Amber
Surface Only
Blue
Blue
N/A
Blue
Surface Std.
(Flush w/opt. BBK2)
Flush Std.
(keypad area not incl. elect. plate)
Chime Key - Will be lighted when the Chime mose is On. A tone or announcement will be heard when certain zone(s) are opened. If OFF
the chime mode is off. There are four different selections: Tone only, Voice, Tone/Voice, and Off. In the programming mode this key also
functions as an insert character key for text programming. The key will be lighted when Chime is On.
Bypass Key - Pressing this key followed by a zone number and the bypass key again will exclude or bypass the selected zone. This
key may also be used to delete a character during text programming. When the Bypass key is lit, one or more zones are bypassed.
* Key - Serves as a clear or reset key. If an error is made while entering digits, press this key to clear the error. Master clear is 3 presses.
# Key - This key is currently a duplicate of the Bypass key.
Numerical Keys - Used for entry of passcodes, programming, etc. Keys 2 - 9 also have an assigned alpha character for entering text.
ELK and Arrow Keys - The ELK and arrow keys have powerful functionality for both normal operation and programming. Pressing the
ELK key displays relative information according to each application. The arrow keys allow scrolling through all available options. The user
can activate or select the displayed option by pressing the right arrow key. Once an option has been selected, the user may be prompted
for a passcode. Additional sub-menu options may appear to assist. The user may return to the status screen by pressing the * key.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 15
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
READY TO ARM
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
9:00AM 08/01/03
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Keypad Menus
The control offers extended Menu Options via the center navigation “ELK” key. Some menus
may require a valid code to authorize. The Factory Default Code for USER Code 1 is: 3 4 5 6
(1 2 3 4 5 6 if the six digit code option is enabled)
Access to menus 1 to 5 can be restricted via programming to only Users that have “User Code Option 8” set. Menus 6 & 8
required a Master or Installer Code. Menu 9 requires the Installer Code. Press ELK to begin, then press the UP or DOWN
arrow key to select a menu. Enter a code if prompted. To select a menu press the RIGHT arrow key.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
1-View/Control r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Automation Fncts
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Allows viewing or controlling of the automation functions such as Tasks, Lighting, Outputs,
Temperature Sensor, Keypad Temperature, and Thermostats. Press the RIGHT arrow key to
select, then choose the desired function using the UP or DOWN arrow keys.
NOTE: The automation functions must be assigned and named using the ELK-RP software.
In most cases they cannot do anything unless they have been written into one of the
“Whenever/And/Then” automation rules.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
† Tasks are like 1 button macros, performing multiple jobs with one push. To activate a task
123456789012345678901234567890
1-Tasks
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
press the RIGHT arrow key and press UP or DOWN to scroll through the list of available tasks.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
To jump directly to a particular task, enter it’s two digit number. Once the task is displayed, all
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890 it takes to activate it is to press the # key.
A rule to use the “Water the Lawn” task might be:
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Water The Lawn
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890 WHENEVER “Water the Lawn” IS ACTIVATED THEN TURN ON Valve 19 FOR 5 MINUTES, etc.
123456789012345678901234567890
01:
#
Activates
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
2-Lighting
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Kitchen Lights
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
001:=Off, # to Chg
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
† Lighting allows the individual control of lights and/or appliances which have been assigned
through the ELK-RP software. Press the RIGHT arrow key to select Lighting, then press the
UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the list. If you know the three digit number, you may
enter it to jump directly to that Lighting/Appliance. The current state of the unit will be
displayed. Press the # key to toggle (change) the unit from on > off or from off > on.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
3-Outputs
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Pump Motor Cntrl
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
001:=Off, # to Chg
123456789012345678901234567890
Outputs might be relays or voltages used to actuate something like a motor, fan, pump, etc.
Outputs can be turned on or turned off from this menu. Press the RIGHT arrow key to select
Outputs, then press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the list. If you know the
three digit number, you may enter it to jump directly to that Output. The current state of the
output will display. Press the # key to toggle (change) the output from on > off or from off > on.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
4-Temperature r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Sensor
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Outside
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
S01:=032 Degrees
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
5-Keypad
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Temperature
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Keypad 01
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
K01:=073 Degrees
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
6-Thermostat
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Temperature
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Hallway
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
T01:=072 Degrees
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
2-Reset
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Smoke Detectors
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
5 Seconds Smoke
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Output Reset
r
123456789012345678901234567890
Continued on next page..
Page 16
Remote “Zone” Temperature Sensors can be read from this menu. Press the RIGHT arrow
key to select this menu, then press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the list of
available sensors. To jump directly to a particular sensor enter it’s two digit number. The
current temperature will be displayed. Press the * key to exit.
Keypad Temperature Sensors can be read from this menu. Press the RIGHT arrow key to
select this menu, then press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the list of available
keypads. To jump directly to a particular keypad enter it’s two digit number. The current
temperature at the keypad will be displayed. Press the * key to exit.
† Thermostats can be read from this menu. Press the RIGHT arrow key to select this menu,
then press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the list of available thermostats. To
jump directly to a particular thermostat enter it’s two digit number. The current temperature at
the thermostat will be displayed. Press the * key to exit.
Used for resetting latched smoke detectors after a fire alarm activation..
Press the RIGHT arrow key to actuate the Reset Smoke Detector feature. This causes the
power to smoke detectors to be removed for 5 seconds. During this time all fire zones will be
ignored to keep an accidental alarm from occurring.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
3-Walk Test Area r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
< Area? Name >
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
000of016 Tested r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
A?-Violate Zones
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
4-View History r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Log
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
b08:00
L001:01/01b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
AreaArmed
103A1
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
5-View Status
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
of all zones
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
6-Change
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
User Codes
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Requires Master or
Installer
Code
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
b
123456789012345678901234567890
001:Selb
Prgr
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
< User Name >
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
7--Automation
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Custom Settings
123456789012345678901234567890
Requires Master or
Installer Code
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
b00:00Timer
CS01:b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Sprklr On
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
8-System
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Settings
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Requires Master or
Installer Code
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
81-Set Sys Clock r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
24hr format
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
82-Out1 Voice
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Adjust Volume r
123456789012345678901234567890
Menu 3 permits a local walk test of all zones assigned to this keypad’s area. The siren(s) and
communicator are disabled during a walk test. Press the RIGHT arrow key to begin a Walk
Test. The keypad displays the total tested zones adjacent to the total number of zones involved.
When a zone is activated, it’s name is displayed across the bottom and can be audible if the
Chime mode is on.
Allows viewing of the past 512 activities stored in the history log. Press the RIGHT arrow key to
view. History activities include: Arm, Disarm, Alarm, Trouble, etc. The top line displays the Log
number, Mth/Day, Time, and event description. The log can ONLY be cleared from ElkRP.
L001 is always the most recent event. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to move forward and
back. Event 512 will be the oldest event. The bottom line displays the event description, the
extended data (zone, user, etc.) and the area number (A1-A8).
Allows viewing of the current status of all zones. Press the RIGHT arrow key to select. Press
UP or DOWN to scroll through the zones or enter a three digit number to jump directly to a
particular zone. I.E. for zone 16 enter 016. Press the * key to exit.
For changing a user code and/or name for codes which have been previously enabled by the
Installer. Only a Master code OR the installer code can access this menu. Press the RIGHT
arrow key to begin. Press UP or DOWN keys to locate a user, or enter 3 digits to jump. Press
RIGHT arrow key to view the existing code. To change, enter the new code digits and listen for 3
beeps to confirm. To edit the name, press the RIGHT arrow key once, then press the DOWN
arrow key. Enter the text using the letters on the keys. I.E. For “K” press the 5 key twice. Move
RIGHT or LEFT with the arrow keys. Press Chime to insert a space. Press Bypass to erases a
letter. The UP and DOWN arrow keys shift from upper to lower case letters. Press the ELK key
to save and exit.
.
Allows an end user to change up to 20 settings incorporated into an automation rule. These
settings can be: time of day, time duration (seconds), or a numeric value. Each custom setting
has a reference number (CS) and a text description: I.E. CS01: Sprkl On 00:00 [Time] implying
a time of day setting. Press the RIGHT arrow key to begin.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to locate a setting, then press the RIGHT arrow key to
select. Enter the new value and press the ELK key to save and exit.
Menu 8 consists of 8 sub-menus used for advanced system settings. Press the right arrow key
and enter a valid user code. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select a sub-menu or enter
the one digit number to jump directly to any sub-menu. I.E. enter 6 to jump to 86.
To set the system clock press the RIGHT arrow key, then press the UP or DOWN arrow key to
select the day. Next, press the RIGHT arrow key to move to Date/Time setting. Enter two digits
for month, date, year, hour, and min. To exit press the * key.
To set the volume for output 1 voice messages (non-alarm) press the RIGHT arrow key and set
desired volume with the UP or DOWN keys. There are 8 settings (0-7). WARNING: PROTECT
EARS! Each adjustment broadcasts a test message through Output 1. To exit press the * key.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
To set keypad adjustments press the RIGHT arrow key. Then press the UP or DOWN keys to select
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
83-Keypad
r
123456789012345678901234567890
one of the three options.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Adjustments
123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1:Set Keypad
r To set keypad beep tones press the RIGHT arrow key, then select the desired tone using the UP or
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
DOWN keys. There are 9 settings (0-8). When done, exit by pressing the * key.
1234567890123456789012345678901
Beep Tone
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
2:Set Keypress r To set key-press beep volume press the RIGHT arrow key, then select the desired volume using
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
the UP or DOWN keys. There are 7 volume levels (1-7) plus Off (0). To exit press the * key.
1234567890123456789012345678901
Beep Volume
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
To set backlight dim level press the RIGHT arrow key, then select the desired level using the UP or
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
3:Set Backlight r
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 DOWN keys. There are 9 backlight levels (1-9) plus Off (0). The keypad automatically dims to this
1234567890123456789012345678901
Dim
Level
1234567890123456789012345678901 setting after 30 seconds of no activity in order to save energy. To exit press the * key.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 17
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
84-System
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Tests
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
1:Battery Test
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
for 30 Seconds
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
2:LCD Test
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
3:Communicator r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Manual Test
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
To perform system tests press the right arrow key. Then press the up or down arrow keys to
select one of the three tests.
The control’s standby battery is load tested automatically every 24hrs. However, it can also be
manually load tested anytime using this option. Press the right arrow key to start the test. The
battery is placed under load for 30 seconds and the battery voltage and system current is
displayed. If the battery falls below a set level, a Low Battery trouble will occur. If it’s necessary
to replace the battery, this test should be used to test and clear a Low Battery Trouble condition.
To test the keypad’s LCD screen press the RIGHT arrow key. The entire screen should appear
black indicating all pixels are working. To exit press the * key.
To manually test the communicator (dialer) press the RIGHT arrow key. Testing is done using
the first phone number that is programmed to send a test code. If there is no phone number
programmed to send a test code, the test will end. To exit this menu press the * key.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Send Test
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Silently
123456789012345678901234567890
There are two types of test, silent and monitored. To silently send a test press the right
arrow key from this display. To hear the test using the inside speakers (OUT1) press the up
or down arrow key to bring up the following display.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Send Test w/
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
speaker monitor
123456789012345678901234567890
This unique feature permits you to hear or “monitor” a single communicator test using the
inside speakers (OUT1) eliminating the need for a telephone “Butt” set. Simply press the
right arrow key from this display to begin.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Turn Butt Set
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Monitor
Mode
On
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Similar to above, this works for multiple communicator tests. Press the right arrow key to
enable. Each communicator transmission will be monitored until mode is cancelled. Press
the star (*) key three times to cancel. Cancelled automatically after 24hr daily battery test.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Clear Pending r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Dialer Reports
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
This special option allows any pending (not reported) dialer communications to be cleared
or cancelled. Typically this will be used only for initial installation and testing.
NOTE: ALWAYS NOTIFY THE MONITORING STATION BEFORE TESTING THE DIALER! If the test
should fail, a Comm Fail trouble will occur. To clear a Comm Fail the dialer must be able to
complete a good communication.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
85-Connect ‘RP’ r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Remote Program
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
1:Seize Line
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Attended Mode
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
2:Seize Line
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
UnAttended
Mode
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
To connect ELK’s Remote Program PC software (RP) via the user assisted method, press the
RIGHT arrow key and then select the connection mode with the UP or DOWN arrow keys.
1:Seize Line Attended Mode - 1) Allows RP connection to begin on an already established voice
connection between the control phone line and the RP Computer. 2) Also useful for manually
answering an incoming call from the RP Computer with programming Rings to Auto Answer.
2:Seize Line Unattended Mode - Pressing the RIGHT arrow key causes the control to dial the
programmed RP telephone number. The RP Computer must be in the “wait for call” mode.
NOTE: UL requires that a Technician be On-Site when doing Remote Programming.
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
This is a collection of tools for diagnosing system problems. Press the RIGHT arrow key and
1234567890123456789012345678901
86-System
r
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
enter a valid user code to begin. Press the UP or DOWN keys to select one of the four tools:
1234567890123456789012345678901
Diagnostics
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
This tool is for use in conjunction with Tech Support to diagnose data bus retries and errors. It
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
1:DataBusErrors b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
displays the device type and number of retries accumulated since the last power-up. T=Device
123456789012345678901234567890
T2A1 Retry 00000
123456789012345678901234567890
type, A=The Address within the device type
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
2:Sys Volt/Curr b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
This tool displays the control’s voltage and average current being drawn from the power supply.
123456789012345678901234567890
13.8V 0.440Amps
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
This tool allows the voltage on each zone to be displayed in real time. It changes as contacts
123456789012345678901234567890
3:Zone=001 Volts
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
or devices are violated. Press the RIGHT arrow key to begin.
123456789012345678901234567890
Display
Level
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890 Use the UP or DOWN keys to scroll through each zone. The displayed information consists of:
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Zn=001 Volt=07.2
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
L04.6 H09.0 A132 the present zone voltage, the L low and H high alarm thresholds, and the analog (A to D)
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
equivalent of the zone voltage..
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
4:LastOnHookTele
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Line V=57,+-20%
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Page 18
This is a read only screen displaying the telephone line voltage during the last on-hook
condition. It is an approximate measurement accurate to only +-20%.
M1G Installation and Programming
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
87-Custom
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Message Record r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
VM01b 1 Block(s)
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Record<
Play>
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
6 Sec Blocks=01b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Record< PlayAll>
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
6 Sec Blocks=01b
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Rec< LiftPhone!
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
VM01b 1 Block(s)
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Record<
Play>
123456789012345678901234567890
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
† This option is used in conjuction with a house telephone (microphone) to record up to 10
custom voice messages. Each message occupies a 6 second block. Two or more
consecutive blocks may be linked together for longer times. Total record time cannot exceed
60 seconds. These messages require the Elk-RP software, which utilize these messages
together with the built-in 500+ word vocabulary to construct voice phrases for many uses,
including the voice dialer. Press the RIGHT arrow key to begin custom message record.
Selects any one of the custom messages (VM01-VM10) for playback or recording. Press the
UP or DOWN arrow keys to select. To Play the selected message press the RIGHT arrow key.
The message will play through Output 1 speakers. To record a new message press the LEFT
arrow key. To exit press the * key.
This sets the number of consecutive 6 sec. record blocks. The default is 01 blocks which is
normally long enough for most applications. However, to create a longer message press the
RIGHT arrow key and enter the number 01 to 02, etc. NOTE: Creating longer messages
reduces the total number of custom messages. This screen also allows all messages to be
played “PlayAll” by pressing the RIGHT arrow key. When ready to record press the LEFT arrow
key.
This is the prerecord screen. To begin recording: 1) lift the house phone (off hook), 2) press
the LEFT arrow key, 3) start speaking. To stop recording press the “0” key. If stop is not
pressed, recording will automatically end after 6 sec. (or the total number of blocks times 6
seconds).
NOTE: A local house phone is used as the microphone. Installer programming menu 07,
option 1, must be set to a 1 in order for the local phone to be recognized by the control.
This will display as soon as recording has stopped. To play the new message press the
RIGHT arrow key. To record the message again press the LEFT arrow key and follow the
same procedures again. To exit press the * key.
Step by step summary of procedures for recording a custom message:
Verify that a house telephone is connected to the control’s T1 and R1 terminals and that Installer menu 07, option 1
is set to a 1. This allows the control to recognize the telephone and allow it to be used as a microphone.
Go to the user menu 8-System Settings by pressing the ELK key and entering 8. Press the r key and enter a valid
user code. Press 87 to reach the custom message record screen.
Using the Up/Down arrow keys, select the voice message to record VM01 to VM10. There are 10 custom
messages.
Press the l key and select the number of 6 second blocks for your message. Hint-rehearse and time the message,
if it is greater than 6 seconds then increase the number of consecutive blocks as required.
Lift the telephone handset and press the l key to begin the recording. The recording will not start until the handset
is off-hook and the l key is pressed.
Record your message by speaking into the handset. If the message is shorter than the amount of time selected
then press 0 to stop recording. Otherwise, recording will stop when the number of blocks is reached.
Press the Right arrow key to play the message. The message will be heard through the telephone handset if it is
still off-hook. Otherwise the message will be directed to the amplifier connected to output 1.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
9-Installation
r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Programming (0)
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Requires
Installer
Code
From this menu you may press the RIGHT arrow to enter Installation Level Programming. If
the Installer Programming Code has not already been entered it will be required at this time.
REFER TO PAGE 22 FOR PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE: The Remote Programming RP software can be used to lockout certain local program capabilities for “antitakeover” purposes. The number in the lower right corner of this menu will indicate the level of lockout as follows:
(0) = No lockout,
(1)=Lockout Telephone number programming - view everything,
(2)=Lockout ALL programming - view everything,
(3)=Lockout ALL Programming and Viewing. This can only be set or removed from the ELK-RP Software.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 19
Menu 0 - Select Keypad Alternate Area - Multi-area (Partition) Operation
This menu allows the keypad to be mapped temporarily to any other area, allowing multi-area (partitioned) operation.
An individually mapped area can be armed, disarmed, and controlled just as if the keypad were permanently assigned
to that area. It may also be used to access a consolidated display of all areas at once, showing the status of each
area.
To reach the keypad menus press the center navigation key labeled “ELK”. A user code may be required depending on
how the control is programmed. The four arrow keys around the Elk key are used to scroll, backup, etc. Pressing the
RIGHT arrow key will select the displayed menu.
1.
2.
Press the ELK key. Enter a user code if prompted.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to find menu “0-Select Keypad Alternate Area”.
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
0-Select Keypad
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
Alternate Area r
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
Auth. Required
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
Enter Valid PIN
1234567890123456789012345678
1234567890123456789012345678
Press the RIGHT arrow key to select this menu and display the following:
Enter a valid user code. The control does not allow (restricts) mapping or viewing of
areas that are not authorized for the user code.
MAPPING TO AN INDIVIDUAL AREA
Enter an area number from 1 to 8 OR scroll UP and DOWN with the arrow keys.
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
ChangeKPArea-1 r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
[Area Name] A1
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
ChangeKPArea-0 r
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
0=All Areas
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Area# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Status X r r r r r r r
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Press the Right Arrow key to map the Keypad to the area shown. The LCD display
and the Ready / Armed LEDs will show the status for the mapped area for 1 minute.
During this minute, it is possible to arm, disarm, bypass, etc. the mapped area from
this keypad. Each time a key is pressed the 1 minute is restarted. However, after 1
minute of no keypress activity, the keypad will return to its original primary assigned
area.
ACCESSING A CONSOLIDATED DISPLAY OF ALL VALID AREAS
Entering “0” for the area number immediately maps the Keypad to a consolidated
‘snapshot’ of all authorized areas. This permits quick arming and disarming only. If an
area is not ready to arm it will be necessary to map individually to that area to view the
violated zone(s) and either secure or bypass them prior to arming.
This example shows all 8 areas, meaning that the User Code was valid for all 8.
The display only shows the areas for which the user code is authorized.
Note the letter beneath each area number.
The single upper case “X” indicates the primary area. This area is controlled exclusively from
the regular operation screens.
A lower case “r” below an area indicates the area is Ready to Arm.
A lower case “n” below an area indicates the area is Not Ready.
A upper case “A” below an area indicates the area is Armed.
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
Area# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
Status X r r - - - - - r
12345678901234567890123456789012
12345678901234567890123456789012
This example shows the user code was only authorized for areas 1, 2, and 3. The
unauthorized area(s) have a “-” below them.
To change or ‘toggle’ the arm status of an area, press the number key representing
the area number. IMPORTANT: The area status is not “real time”. It is a snapshot
taken when the RIGHT arrow key was pressed. If a zone has since become violated
the area will still be displaying “r”, however the letter will immediately change to “n”
and the keypad will emit an error tone when an attempt is made to arm by pressing
the area number.
When finished, press the “*” key to exit.
Page 20
M1G Installation and Programming
Section 3 - Programming The Control
3.1 Introduction
The Security functionality of the M1 Control can be programmed either from an ELK-M1KP LCD Keypad OR from the ELK-RP
PC Software. The keypad features a menu-driven “Text” based interface with simple Yes/No answers for most options. After
just a short amount of experience the average installer will not even require an instruction manual to keypad program the
control.
For the Automation functionality the ELK-RP PC Software is a requirement. The options and capabilities available for
automation are so unique and powerful that it takes a PC to make use of all the benefits. The M1 features a powerful
“Whenever/And/Then” RULES based programming that allows almost any imaginable operation.
3.2 Local Keypad Programming
There are two levels of operation for programming the control locally, user level and installer level.
- User level programming provides the ability to add, change, or delete user passcodes and names. It also allows custom
automation settings to be viewed and changed. A master user code is required to access the user code and custom settings
screens. User programming is explained in the User’s Guide.
- Installer level programming allows total customizing of the Security operating features. Only the installer code may access
this level. If the installer code is lost or forgotten, it is impossible to program the control locally. Anyone attempting installer
level programming should be familiar with the contents of this publication prior to programming the control panel. If remote
programming is used, it is possible to “lock out” or prevent takeover of a control by another installation company by selecting
“Lockout Local Prog.” This prevents the installer passcode from gaining access to programming via an LCD keypad. The
installer passcode may still be used for the non-programming functions described in Chapter 2. Lockout Local Prog does not
affect remote programming.
3.3 Local or Remote Computer Programming (ELK-RP) and Anti-Takeover
ELK-RP programming utilizes extensive error checking and security safeguards, including data encryption, password log-on,
serial number, and dealer assigned RP access code. The serial # identifies the control to RP while the RP access code
identifies the computer to the control prior to a programming session. RP loads the access code during the first connection. It
cannot be viewed or changed from local keypad programming. In addition to these safeguards, you can set an anti-takeover
option from RP which prevents certain keypad programming. Even a total default of the panel programming cannot reset the
anti-takeover option once it is set..
The Factory Default Elk-RP Access Code is: 2 4 6 8 0 1
NOTE: UL requires that a Technician be On-Site when doing Remote Programming.
3.4 Area Partitioning
The control may be divided into 1 to 8 independent areas (partitions). Each area appears as a full-featured system, allowing
one control to be shared by multiple, independent departments within a common structure. Zones, User Codes, and
Keypads may be assigned to any 1 area up to the maximum number available. An example is a single building divided into
room(s) to be armed/disarmed separately. Mount the control in a secure area (common utility closet) with dedicated and
uninterrupted AC power and telephone service. Then assign zones, codes, and keypads to each department.
Output 1 siren/voice activates on all alarms, regardless of the area. The RP Software Rules can be used create additional
(separate) outputs. When reporting to the central station events like AC Power Failure, Automatic tests, Low Battery, etc., are
considered system reports and are transmitted using the Area 1 account number. If area partitioning is not desired, simply
designate all zones to a single area (Area 1) which is the factory default setting for zones 1-16.
COMMON AREA - Another popular feature is the ability to have one or more areas made “common” to Area 1. This is often
referred to as a “Vestibule Feature”. Any of the Areas 2 thru 8 may be made common to Area 1. The result is: Area 1 cannot be
armed until all its common areas are armed. Once armed, Area 1 will disarm if any common area becomes disarmed. This
is good for lobbies or vestibules shared by two or more people. Each area must have its own keypad. NOTE: If you want
Area 1 to automatically arm when all its common areas become armed, use a Whenever/And/Then rule from the RP
software to do this.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 21
3.5 Communicator Setup Checklist
The Communicator (Dialer) can dial up to 8 phone numbers plus RP. Digital reporting formats include: Pulse 4+2, SIA,
Contact ID, and Pager. There is also a Voice † format which can be commanded from the RP Rules Programming to call a
persons home or cellphone and deliver a voice message.
Use the following checklist for each required telephone number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Under Menu 08 - Telephone Account Setup, select one of the telephone numbers and program the following:
Option 01: Select the desired reporting format - 0=Disable, 1=Contact ID, 2=SIA, 3=Pulse 4+2, 4=Pager, 5=Voice †
Note: The Voice format (5) cannot be enabled from keypad programming. It can only be programmed from the
Elk-RP Software using the Whenever/And/Then Rules.
Option 02: Set the priority for the first (primary number) to 0 = Always Report.
Option 03: Program the telephone number digits to be dialed. No special start or ending characters are required.
Option 04: Set the dial attempts to greater than 0. For Digital reports 8 is suggested. For Voice the max. is 2.
Option 05 Program the digits for the account number to report. Each area (partition) has its own Acct. Number.
Option 13: Select Yes to have Area info, Zone Alarms, Zone Restores, and Zone Unbypasses reported to this Tel #.
Option 14: Select Yes if you wish to have Zone Bypasses reported to this Tel #.
Option 15: Select Yes if you wish to have Zone Troubles reported to this Tel #.
Option 16: Select Yes if you wish to have User (Open/Close) Reports reported to this Tel #.
Option 17: Select Yes if you wish to have Global System Events (AC Fail, Low Battery, etc.) reported to this Tel #.
Option 18: Although not required, you may program a text name for each telephone number.
Under Menu 09 - Area Reporting Codes, select the area (partition) and program the desired options such as: Dialer
Delay, Alarm Abort, Auto Open/Closings, etc. then .
Under Menu 10 - Zone Reporting Codes, select the zone number and program the desired options such as: Zone Alarms,
Restores, Bypasses, or Trouble.
Option A: For Zone Alarm program a two digit code. To have the automatic SIA or Contact ID report codes transmitted
simply program a nonzero value. I.E. Program a 1 (01).
Option R: For Zone Restore program a two digit code. For automatic SIA or Contact ID codes program a 1 (01).
Option B: For Zone Bypass program a two digit code. For automatic SIA or Contact ID codes program a 1 (01).
Option T: For Zone Trouble program a two digit code. For automatic SIA or Contact ID codes program a 1 (01).
Under Menu 11 - F Key Reporting Codes, select and program the alarm code for each desired Keypad Panic Key. NOTE:
Keypad Panics only have Alarm report codes, they do not have restore codes. For automatic SIA or Contact ID codes
program a 1 (01).
Under Menu 12 - Sys Report Code Options & Codes, select and program each desired option such as: AC Fail, Low
Battery, Automatic Test, and other system wide options, including the time values for certain options. For automatic SIA or
Contact ID report codes program a 1 (01).
Under Menu 13 - User Report Codes, select and and program an Open or Close report code for any User(s) that you
wish to track arm/disarm events, including arm/disarm by the Installer Code or Elk-RP computer.
3.6 Entering Installer Level Programming
1.
Press the center ‘ELK’ key once followed by the DOWN arrow key until display reads “9-Installation Programming”. NOTE:
The keypad may beep and display the following:
2. Enter the Installer Program Code when required.
Press the right arrow key to select the “Installation Programming” option.
The Factory Default Installer Program Code is: 1 7 2 8 3 9
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Auth. Required
Enter Valid Pin
For security against unauthorized programming changes, the installer code should be changed from its factory default setting.
This can be done from Menu 07 - Globals System Definitions, Option 42.
Once the Installer Code has been entered, the first programming menu will display and a 4 minute timer will be started.
If there is no key-press activity during this time period the control will automatically exit from the programming mode. It
is easy to navigate around and between the programming menus and options using the up and down arrow keys. When
the correct menu or option is located, press the right arrow key to proceed into that menu.
Refer to the Quick Reference Guide on the following page to locate a particular menu or to see what options
appear under each menu. Refer to the individual menus and their option descriptions for details about each of the
programmable items.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 22
M1G Installation and Programming
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 23
Menu 03
Area Defs
Area 1
(1) Exit Delay 1
(2) Entry Delay 1
(3) Exit Delay 2
(4) Entry Delay 2
(5) Auto Stay
(6) Exit Restart
(7) Closing Ringback
(8) SglKey Quickarm
(9) DblKey Quickarm
(10) StayKeyScroll
(11) Stay Instant
(12) Night Scroll
(13) Night Instant
(14) StayChgArmed
(15) [Name]
Menu 02
User Code Auth.
User 1
(1) Area #
(2) Arm
(3) Disarm
(4) Bypass
(5) Access
(6) Temporary
(7) Master
(8) Menu 1-5
(9) Duress
(10) [Name]
Enrolling
-Disp Totat Modules
-Allow Module Edit
Menu 01
Bus Mod Enroll
Menu 05
Zone Defs
Zone 1
(1) Definition
(2) Type
(3) Area Assign
(4) Silent Alarm
(5) Dialer Delay
(6) Listen-In
(7) Bypass
(8) Force Arm
(9) Swinger
(10) Per. Trip
(11) Fast Loop
(12) Chime
(13) Cross Zn
(14) [Name]
Menu 04
Keypad Defs
Keypad 1
(1) Area Assgn
(2) Silent Entry
(3) Silent Exit
(4) Silent Chime
(5) Dark in 60 sec
(6) Show Date/Time
(7) Show Temp
(8) Show Area
(9) Byp Req Code
(10) F1 Key Def.
(11) F2 Key Def
(12) F3 Key Def
(13) F4 Key Def
(14) F5 Key Def
(15) F6 Key Def
(16) [Name]
Menu 07
Global Options
(1) Tel Remote
(2) 12hr TimeDisp
(3) DD/MM Disp.
(4) Celcius Disp.
(5) DST Observe
(6) Fast Loop Tm
(7) SlowLoop Tm
(8) Cross SelfVer
(9) Cross Zn Tm
(10) Aud Trbls
(11) 6 digit codes
(12) CodeLockout
(13) Common Area
(14) Out1 Yelp to Buz
(15) Out1 Start Vol.
(16) Out1 Max. Alm.
(17) Out1 Max. Voice
(18) Out1 Max. NonAlm
(19) Out1 ‘No Talk’
(20) Out1 Say Sys
(21) Out1 Say Alms
(22) Out1 Say Zn Status
(23) Out1 Say Sys Tbl
(24) Out1 Say Zn Tbl
(25) Out1 Say Chime
Menu 06
Cutoff Timers
(1) Burglar
(2) Fire
(3) Medical
(4) Police
(5) Carbon Mon
(6) Emergency
(7) Freeze
(8) Gas
(9) Heat
(10) Water
(11) Aux1 24hr
(12) Aux2 24hr
Menu 07
Global Options (cont.)
(26) Out 2 Change to Voltage
(27) Out 2 Delay Time
(28) Out 2 Sgl Alarm Lockout
(29) Rings til Answer
(30) Ring/Hang/Answer
(31) 2 Way Listen-in Enable
(32) 2 Way Callback Time
(33) CS Alm Verify Time
(34) Baud Rate Port 0
(35) Xmit Event Log
(36) Xmit Zone Changes
(37) Xmit Output Changes
(38) Xmit Task Changes
(39) Xmit Light Changes
(40) Xmit Keypad Keys
(41) Req Code User Menus 1-5
(42) Local Prog. Code
(43) Serial Number [Read Only]
(44) Software Ver. [Read Only]
(45) Default Control Options
(81) Default User Codes
(82) Default Areas Data
(83) Default Keypads Data
(84) Default Zones Data
(85) Default Zone Names
(86) Default Cutoff Timers
(87) Default Global Data
(88) Default Telephone Data
(89) Default Telephone Numbers
(90) Default Area Report Codes
(91) Default Zone Report Codes
(92) Default System Report Codes
(93) Default User Report Codes
(94) Default Voice Messages
(95) Default Wireless Definitions
(99) Default Entire Control Panel
Menu 09
Area Report Codes
Area 1
(1) Dial Delay Time
(2) Abort Code
(3) Cancel Time
(4) Cancel Code
(5) Close Auto
(6) Close Early
(7) Close Extended
(8) Fail to Close
(9) Late Close
(10) Keyswitch Close
(11) Duress Code
(12) Open After Alarm
(13) Open Early
(14) Fail to Open
(15) Open Late
(16) Keyswitch Open
(17) User Lockout
(18) Exit Error
(19) Fail to Comm
Menu 08
Telephone #’s & Accts
Telephone #1
(1) Always Report
(2) Number
(3) Format
(4) Attempts
(5) Acct #1
(6) Acct #2
(7) Acct #3
(8) Acct #4
(9) Acct #5
(10) Acct #6
(11) Acct #7
(12) Acct #8
(13) Report Area/Alm
/Rest/Unbypass
(14) Report Zn Bypass
(15) Report Zn Troubles
(16) Report User Op/Cl
(17) Report Sys Globals
(18) [Name]
ELK-M1G QUICK REFERENCE - MENU PROGRAMMING
Menu 12
System Rpt Codes
(1) AC Fail Delay
(2) AC Fail Code
(3) Auto Test Code
(4) TstTime hr:mm
(5) Days betweenTest
(6) Aux Overcurrent
(7) Exp Module Tbl
(8) Installer Begin
(9) Installer End
(10) Log 80% Full
(11) Low Battery
(12) Memory Error
(13) RP Download
(14) Tel Line Fault
(15) Output 2 Tbl
Menu 11
Keypad
Report Codes
Keypad 1
(1) F1 Key Alarm
(2) F2 Key Alarm
(3) F3 Key Alarm
(4) F4 Key Alarm
(5) F5 Key Alarm
(6) F6 Key Alarm
Menu 10
Zone Rpt Codes
Zone #1
Alarm Code
Restore Code
Bypass Code
Trouble Code
Menu 14
Wireless Defs
1: ReceiverOptions
(1) Receiver Size
(2) ZnBank(Start Zn)
(3) Reg Supv. Hrs.
(4) Fire Supv. Hrs.
2: Transmitter Opts
^ Select Transmitter
(1) Enable Xmtr.
(2) Supv. Type
(3) Enable Option 1
(4) Enable Option 2
(5) Keyfob User ID
3: Learn Transmitter
^ Select Transmitter
(1) Xmtr to Learn
(2) Push Xmtr
4: Keyfob Event Def.
(1) Button 1 Code
(2) Button 2 Code
(3) Button 3 Code
(4) Button 4 Code
(5) Button 5 Code
(6) Button 6 Code
(7) Button 7 Code
(8) Button 8 Code
User 101
- RP Computer
Upload/Download
(1) Open Code
Close Code
User 100
- Installer(1) Open Code
Close Code
Menu 13
User Rpt Codes
User #1
(1) Open Code
Close Code
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
01-Bus Module
Enrollment
r
Menu 01 - Bus Module Enrollment
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
NOTE: Every data bus device: Keypad, Input (Zone) Expander, Output Expander, etc. MUST have a unique
address within its type. This menu is then used to enroll the device into the system. SEE DETAILS BELOW:
Bus Module Enroll
Description of Option
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Press the RIGHT arrow key to select this menu and automatically start the bus enrollment
process. ALL data bus devices which are presently connected to the data bus should
become enrolled.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The enrollment process only takes a few seconds. Once complete, this summary screen
will appear displaying the total number of bus modules that were found and enrolled. To
edit and/or view the devices individually, press the RIGHT arrow key one time.
Enrolling
Bus Modules
XX Bus Modules
Enrolled, Editr
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Keypad
Addr=01
T1 b
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Keypad
Addr=02
T1 b
lr
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
End Enrollment
0x Bus Modules
Each enrolled keypad/device can be viewed one by one. The first device will always be
Keypad 1 with a T1 (for type 1) and Addr=01 (for address 01). As explained below,
different kinds of devices can be identified by their device “Type”. Pressing the Up or Down
arrow keys will scroll through each enrolled device.
If a device is removed from the data bus, it should be removed by repeating the enrollment
process. The control will only enroll the devices that are connected. It will remove any
previously enrolled devices that it does not see.
After the last device is reviewed, the next press of the Up arrow key moves to the “End
Enrollment” screen which once again displays the total number of devices enrolled.
DATA BUS DEVICE TYPES AND ADDRESSES: Each data bus device is a specific “Device Type”. Keypads are TYPE
1, Input (Zone) Expanders are TYPE 2, Output Expanders are TYPE 3, Serial Port Expanders are TYPE 5. Any new
devices designed will be assigned a Device Type. Every data bus device MUST have a unique “Address” setting within
its type. Valid Input Expanders addresses are 2 to 13, Output Expander addresses are 1 to 13. The address determines
the starting and ending zone or output numbers for that expander. See chart below:
Addr Input Exp
1 = N/A (main bd)
2 = Zone 17-32
3 = Zone 33-48
4 = Zone 49-64
5 = Zone 65-80
Output Exp
Outputs 1-16
Output 17-32
Output 33-48
Output 49-64
Output 65-80
Addr
6=
7=
8=
9=
10 =
Input Exp
Zone 81-96
Zone 97-112
Zone 113-128
Zone 129-144
Zone 145-160
Output Exp.
Output 65-80
Output 97-112
Output 113-128
Output 129-144
Output 145-160
Addr Input Exp
11 = Zone 161-176
12 = Zone 177-192
13 = Zone 193-208
Output Exp.
Output 161-176
Output 177-192
Output 193-208
INPUT AND OUTPUT EXPANDER ADDRESSES: Locate the bank of four white (DIP) switches along the top edge of the
board. Each switch has a position of Off or On (0 or 1) and a binary value (1, 2, 4, 8). The addition of the binary values
(sum total) for the switches set to the On position determines the data bus address. For example: Data bus address 5
is set by placing switches 1 and 4 to the On position (1 + 4 = 5). All other switches must be in the down or Off position.
KEYPAD ADDRESSES: All keypads are factory set to address 1. Valid addresses are 1 to 16. The first keypad on the
system (Keypad 1) is automatically enrolled upon power up. Each additional keypad must be assigned a unique
address and then manually enrolled from “Menu 1 - Bus Module Enrollment”. To set the address on a keypad do the
following:
1. Hold down a key while applying power OR press and hold the (Asterisk) “ * ” and F5 keys for 5 seconds.
2. Press the F1 key, then use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to set the desired address number.
3. Press the EXIT key when done.
NOTE: If a device is removed from the data bus, it should be un-enrolled to prevent a trouble. To replace a
defective device, set the address to the same value as the old unit and initiate the Bus Enrollment process.
Page 24
M1G Installation and Programming
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
02-UserCode Optn
Code used to:
r
Menu 02 - User Code Options
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Default Code for User Code 1 is: 3 4 5 6 Note: If six digit code option is enabled, the
default will be 1 2 3 4 5 6. See Menu 07 - Global System Definitions, Option G11
User Code Options
Description of Option
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
User 1 (001) is the first to display. Press the right arrow key to program, or press the up
or down arrow keys to select another user. Enter three digits to jump to a specific user.
The user name is displayed along the bottom.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
This option assigns the areas(s) in which this code may be used. For example: if the
numbers 1,2, & 4 are displayed, the code may be used in those areas. To assign or
remove an area press the numbers keys 1 thru 8. Each press toggles the number on/off.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Selects Arm privileges. If Yes, this code can Arm it’s assigned area(s) (see option 01
above) from a keypad that is also assigned to the desired area. If No, this code cannot be
used to Arm.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Selects Disarm privileges. If Yes, this user code can Disarm it’s assigned area(s) (see
option 01 above) from a keypad that is also assigned to the desired area. If No, this code
cannot be used to Disarm.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A Yes allows this code to Bypass zones whenever Menu 04-Keypad Definitions, Option
09, “Byp Key Req PIN” is set to Yes. Code and Keypad must be in the same area.
Default value for both these options is No (code not required for bypass).
001: Selb
User 1
Prgr
001 01:12345678 r
Code used inArea
001 02:=Yes
Arm with Code
r
001 03:=Yes
r
Disarm with Code
001 04:=Yes
r
Bypass with Code
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
001 05:=No
r
Access with Code
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
001 06:=No
r
Temporary Code
A Yes allows this code to activate the Access Keypad Events 1313-1328 for the keypad
where code is entered. Use the Whenever/And/Then Rules from Elk-RP to assign an
output to this event for tripping a door strike or lock. Note: If this code is enabled for
arming, it will be necessary to press the Exit or Stay key to arm after the code.
If Yes, this code will be restricted from disarming whenever the control has been armed by
a regular (non temporary) code. In other words: The control MUST be armed by this code
(or another temporary code) in order for it to allow disarming by a temporary code. A
temporary code might be used for cleaning, repair personnel, etc.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A Master Code can be used to review, change, or delete other users, and to modify
selected system options. Only one Master code is needed per system. For security
purposed, multiple Master codes are not recommended.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
001 08:=No
r
Menu 1-5 Allowed
When Menu 07 - Global System Definitions, Option 41, “Require Code User Menu 1-5” is
set to a Yes, this option is then used to set which codes are allowed to access Menus 1 5. NOTE: Menus 6, 7, and 8 are only available to a Master or Installer code.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
If Yes, this code will cause a silent Duress or “holdup” alarm to activate when the code is
used to arm or disarm the system. CAUTION: The communicator report code MUST
also be programmed! This feature is dangerous and should be used with caution.
001 07:=Yes
Master Code
001 09:=No
Duress
r
r
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
001 10:Usr Name l
User1
To edit the User Name text (max. of 16 characters) press the left arrow key. Enter text
using the number keys. I.E. For a “K” press the 5 key twice. To move the cursor, press
the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys. The Chime key inserts a space, the Bypass key erases
1 digit. The up/down keys to toggle between upper and lower case. Press the ELK key
when complete.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 25
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
03-Area
Definitions
r
Menu 03 - Area Definitions
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Area Defintions
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
A1: Selb
Area 1
Prgr
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
A1 01:=060
r
Exit Delay1 Time
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
A1 02:=030
r
Entry Delay1Time
Description of Option
Of the 8 potential areas (partitions), Area 1 is the first to display. Press the right arrow
key to program, or press the up or down arrow keys to select another area. To jump to a
specific area enter the number (1-8). The area name is displayed on the bottom.
The amount of exit time in seconds for all zones programmed as Exit Delay 1. Range is
045 to 255 seconds. Default value is 060. If an Exit Delay 1 zone is enabled for force
arm, its exit time will be the greater of the values for Exit 1 or Exit 2. Do not
enable force arm on Exit Delay 1 zones if this operation is not desired.
The amount of entry delay time in seconds for zones programmed as Entry Delay 1.
Range is 030 to 255 seconds. Default value is 030.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The amount of exit delay time in seconds for zones programmed as Exit Delay 2. Range
is 045 to 255 seconds. Default value is 060. See note above regarding force arm
and Exit Delay 1 zones.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The amount of entry delay time in seconds for zones programmed as Entry Delay 2.
Range is 030 to 255 seconds. Default value is 030.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
If Yes, the control will switch from AWAY mode to STAY mode at the end of the exit delay
time if no exit zone is violated (no exit detected). NOTE: This tracks the longest of the
two exit timers. All interior zones are bypassed in the STAY mode. Default value is No.
A1 03:=060
r
Exit Delay2 Time
A1 04:=030
r
Entry Delay2Time
A1 05:=No
r
AutoStay No Exit
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
A1 06:=Yes
r
Exit1TimeRestart
†† If this option is set to Yes (default), the exit procedures will be affected in three ways:
1) Additional Exit1 “Grace” feature - During the initial Exit Delay 1 time if the zone violates a second time and restores,
the exit timer will automatically restart one time. I.E. If the Exit1 door is opened, closed, and then opened again the
timer will restart. NOTE: This only works on Exit Delay 1 zones and the timer only restarts one time. It does
NOT work if the zone is enabled for force arm! This features complies with the SIA CP-01. †
2) “Leave for Work” or “Pet” feature - When armed in one of the Stay modes a User may press the Exit key to re-start
the exit delay in order to open an exit/entry door and leave for work. The system remains in the Stay mode in case
other family members are still in the house. This can also be used to let a pet outdoors. When the pet is ready to
come back inside the User can press the Exit key again to restart the timer and open the door.
3) Going from Stay to Away Mode - When armed in one of the Stay modes a User may change the arm mode to Away
by pressing the Exit key twice in short succession (within 3 seconds) and the leave the building.
Exit Error If an entry/exit zone is violated when the Exit Delay expires, the Exit Error Feature will be activated. The
local siren will sound immediately and the Entry Delay warning will begin. IF the control is not disarmed before the
delay expires the communicator will report the alarm along with an Exit Error code, provided these codes are
programmed. An Exit Error event flag will also be set which can be used by the “Whenever/And/Then” rules (refer to
the ELK-RP software) to sound a siren, or blink a light, or whatever. Exit Error complies with SIA CP-01. †
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 26
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 03 - Area Definitions (continued)
Area Definitions
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 07:=No Sendr
Closing Ringback
Description of Option
If Yes, a Closing Ringback signal (otherwise known as closing report successful) will be
sent to all the keypads when the Communicator transmits a closing report and the Central
Station Receiver kissoff (acknowledgement) is received. The Exit Delay time will be
restarted at this time. The default value is No.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix F for Commercial Burglar requirements.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
If Yes, the control can be armed by a single press of the Exit or Stay keys. No code is
required except to disarm. Note: This option cannot be set to Yes if “Dbl Key Quick
Arm” (see below) is set to Yes. The default value is Yes.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 09:=No
r
DblKeyQuickArm
If Yes, the system can be armed by a double press of the Exit or Stay keys. The second
press must follow the first very quickly. Note: This option cannot be set to Yes if “Sgl
Key Quick Arm” (see above) is set to Yes. The default value is No.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 10:=Yes
r
Stay Key Scroll
If Yes, the Stay key may be pressed during the exit delay time to scroll (step) through the
selected levels of Stay arming. I.E. Stay Instant, Stay Night, etc. The options below
select the levels that will be available. The default value is Yes.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
If Yes, AND option 10 is set to Yes, multiple presses of the Stay key during exit delay will
be able to scroll to the Stay Instant arming level. The default value is No.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
If Yes, AND option 10 is set to Yes, multiple presses of the Stay key during exit delay will
be able to scroll to the Stay Night arming level. The default value is Yes.
A1 08:=Yes
r
Sgl Key Quickarm
A1 11:=No
r
StayInstantScr
A1 12:=Yes
Night Scroll
r
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 13:=No
r
NightInstantScr
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 14:=No
r
StayChgIfArmed
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
A1 15:AreaNamel
Area 1
If Yes, AND option 10 is set to Yes, multiple presses of the Stay key during exit delay will
be able to scroll to the Stay Night Instant arming level. The default value is No.
†† This option should be used with caution. If Yes, the Stay key may be used to scroll or
step the armed level after exit delay has expired and the control is fully armed. The
default value is No.
To program the text description of the Area Name (max. of 16 characters) press the left
arrow key. Enter text using the number keys. I.E. For a “K” press the 5 key twice. To
move the cursor press the right or left arrow keys. While programming the text, pressing
the Chime key inserts a space, and the Bypass key erases 1 digit. The up and down
arrow keys toggle between upper and lower case. Press the ELK key when complete.
VACATION MODE: During the exit delay time the Away key may be pressed to convert from Away mode to Away
Vacation mode. The Away Vacation mode does not alter any of the security arming times or zones. Its primary purpose
is for use with the Whenever/And/Then Rules programming of Elk-RP for enhanced energy savings modes.
†† AUTO ARMING: The control has an Auto Arming feature which may be setup using the “Whenever/And/Then Rules”
in the ELK-RP PC Programming Software. Basically, a rule must be written to initiate the auto arm sequence at a
specific time and/or date occurrence along with a programmable pre-warning time period. At the end of the pre-warn
time, the system will automatically arm to the AWAY mode, bypassing any violated Burglar zones. All area keypad(s)
will beep and display a warning when the initiating time occurs. Pressing the * key clears this warning for 1 minute. The
auto arm time may be extended in 10 minute increments by pressing the RIGHT arrow key. No further warnings will
occur until 10 minutes prior to the newly “extended” auto arm time. Example 1: If a scheduled AutoArm is set for
06:00pm with a pre-warn time of 20 minutes, the warning will start at 6:00pm and the auto arm will occur at 6:20pm.
Pressing the RIGHT arrow key to extend the time will cause the new auto arm time to be 6:30pm.
† † Not for use in UL Listed Systems
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 27
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
04-Keypad
Definitions
r
Keypad Definitions
Menu 04 - Keypad Definitions
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Description of Option
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Up to 16 Keypads may be connected. Keypad 1 is the first to display. Press the right
arrow key to program, or press the up or down arrow keys to select another keypad. To
jump to any keypad enter the number (1-16). The keypad name displays on the bottom.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
A keypad can only be assigned as primary for a single area. However, it is possible to
“Map” a keypad to another area. Refer to Keypad Menus for instructions. Select which
“primary” area (1 to 8) that the keypad should be assigned. The default value is 1.
KP01: Selb
Keypad 1
Prgr
KP01 01:=1
r
Area Assigned To
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
KP01 02:=No
r
Silent on Entry
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
KP01 03:=No
Silent on Exit
r
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
KP01 04:=No
r
Silent on Chime
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
KP01 05:=No
r
Go dark in 60sec
If Yes, the keypad will not produce an entry warning signal during entry delay time after
violation of a delay 1 or delay 2 zone while armed. The default value is No.
If Yes, the keypad will not produce an exit warning tone during exit delay 1 or exit delay 2
times upon arming. The default value is No.
If Yes, the keypad will not produce any Chime tone even though the Chime mode may be
on and a chime type zone is violated. This is good for a baby’s room, etc. The default
value is No.
If Yes, the keypad will turn off all backlighting, including Armed or Ready lights, 60 secs.
after arming OR no pushbutton activity. This helps prevent unauthorized viewing of arm/
disarm status through a front glass window or door. Any button press resumes the status
display. The default value is No. NOTE: If any of the F Keys are being used as event
indicators this will also darken them, basically making them non-usable.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
If Yes, the keypad will display the date and time on the bottom line of the LCD screen.
Not Available With M1KPAS! If there is too much information to display at once, the
bottom line of the LCD will alternate. The default value is Yes.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
If Yes, the keypad will display it’s local temperature on the bottom line of the LCD screen.
Not Available With M1KP2 or M1KPAS! If there is too much information to display at
once, the bottom line of the LCD will alternate. The default value is Yes.
KP01 06:=Yes
r
Show Date & Time
KP01 07:=Yes
r
Show Temperature
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
KP01 08:=Yes
r
Show Area Name
If Yes, the keypad will display the name of the area in which it belongs. If there is too
much information to display at once, the bottom line of the LCD will alternate. Not
Available With M1KPAS! The default value is Yes.
KP01 09:=No
r
Byp Key Req PIN
If Yes, the Bypass key cannot be used unless a valid user code is entered.
Available With M1KPAS! The default value is No.
Not
Keypad F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6 keys Each keypad has 6 lighted function keys that may be programmed to activate
specific operations. There are 7 programming attributes for each key: 1) KeyEvent - A four digit event code for the zone
definitions 0001 thru 0035, or the automation tasks 2001 - 2032. 2) KeyLight - A four digit event code which lights the
key when the event is active. This can be any of the Appendix A Event Codes. 3) Light Invert - A Yes/No option which
allows the light to be opposite of the event, off when active, on when not. 4) Light Blink - A Yes/No option which allows
the light to blink when active. 5) Key Requires PIN - A Yes/No option used to prevent the key from activating unless a
valid user code is entered. 6) Single Key Press - A Yes/No option which allows a single press of the key instead of the
normal double press to activate the event. NOTE: In the double press mode the key’s name is displayed on the LCD
screen as soon as the first press occurs. This serves to visually verify to the user that the correct key has been
selected prior to the second “activating” key press. 7) Key Name - A sixteen character programmable description that
describes the key’s function. I.E. Police Alarm, Garage Door, etc.
Page 28
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 04 - Keypad Definitions (continued)
Keypad Definitions
Description of Option
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
To program the F1 key definitions press the right arrow key. The program will branch off
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
into the 7 options for this key. To select another option press the UP or DOWN arrow
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
keys. To jump to a specific option enter the two digit number for that option.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Key Event refers to what the key activates. F Keys can used to activate an Alarm, an
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Automation Task, or by Elk-RP Whenever/And/Then Rules to activate most anything.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Press the RIGHT arrow key and enter 4 digits. Enter 0000 if Elk-RP is going to be
12345678901234567890123456789012123
KP01 10:F1 Key r
Definitions
F1KeyEvent=0010r
Evt=Fire Alarm
used exclusively. Enter 0001-0036 for an alarm activation (see zone Defs), or 20012032 for an automation task activation (see Elk-RP software). The event description
is displayed along the bottom. Press the RIGHT arrow key to move to the next option.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
F1KeyLight=1001r
Evt=Fire Alarm
Key Light selects the event which will cause the key to light up. See Event Codes in
Appendix A. Press the RIGHT arrow key and enter 4 digits. The bottom line displays
the description of the event. Press the RIGHT arrow key to move to the next option.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Light Invert selects whether the key should be lighted when the event is On (normal) or
when the event is Off (Inverted). Press the RIGHT arrow key and select 1 for Yes or 0
for No. Press the RIGHT arrow key to move to the next option.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Light Blink selects whether the key should blink when lighted or be steady. Press the
RIGHT arrow key and select 1 for Yes or 0 for No. Press the RIGHT arrow key to
move to the next option.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
F1 Key:=No
r
Key Requires PIN
Key Requires PIN selects whether the F key requires a valid user code prior to
activation. Press the RIGHT arrow and select 1 for Yes or 0 for No. Press the RIGHT
arrow key to move to the next option.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
If this option is Yes, a single press of the F key will activate the event. If No, then two
presses OR single press and hold 2 seconds is required. Press the RIGHT arrow and
select 1 for Yes or 0 for No. Press the RIGHT arrow key to move to the next option.
F1 Key:=No
Light Invert
F1 Key:=No
Light Blink
r
r
F1 Key:=No
r
SingleKeyPress
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
F1 Key Name
F1 = Fire
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
lr
The Key Name will be displayed whenever the F key is pressed. Press the LEFT
arrow key and enter text using the number keys. I.E. For “K” press the 5 key twice.
Move the cursor using the right or left arrow keys. The up or down arrow keys select
between lower and upper case. Press the ELK key when complete.
KP01 11:F2 Key r
Definitions
If the F2 Key is to be used, repeat the steps above.
KP01 12:F3 Key r
Definitions
If the F3 Key is to be used, repeat the steps above.
KP01 13:F4 Key r
Definitions
KP01 14:F5 Key r
Definitions
KP01 15:F6 Key r
Definitions
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
KP01 16:KP Namel
Keypad 1
If the F4 Key is to be used, repeat the steps above.
If the F5 Key is to be used, repeat the steps above. NOTE: M1KP2 does not have an F5
If the F6 Key is to be used, repeat the steps above. NOTE: M1KP2 does not have an F6
To edit the Keypad Name press the LEFT arrow key. Enter text using the number keys.
I.E. For “K” press the 5 key twice. Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys to move the
cursor. The UP or DOWN keys select between lower and upper case. The Chime key
inserts a space, and the Bypass key erases 1 digit. Press the ELK key when complete.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 29
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
05-Zone
Definitions
r
Zone Definitions
Menu 05 - Zone Definitions
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Description of Option
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001: Selb Prgr
Zone 001
There are up to 208 zones. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll and select a
particular zone. To jump to any zone, enter the number from 001 to 208. The zone name
will display along the bottom line. Press the right arrow to program the selected zone.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This first option is used to set the zone definition. To locate a different option press the up
or down arrow key OR enter an option’s number to jump directly to it. Press the right
arrow key to program the selected option. The available definitions are:
ZN001 01:Def=01 r
Burg Entry/Exit1
Def Zone Description
Operating Characteristics
00
01
02
03
Disabled - Used to remove any unused zone(s). No need to put a jumper or resistor across the terminals.
Burglar Entry/Exit 1 - For perimeter entry/exit doors. Allows a time delay to enter and exit during arm and disarm.
Burglar Entry/Exit 2 - For perimeter entry/exit doors that require more time delay during arm and disarm.
Burglar Perimeter Instant - Windows and perimeter openings. Activates an immediate Burglary alarm if tripped
during ANY armed mode. Does not provide any exit or entry delay.
04 Burglar Interior - For motion detectors, interior doors, etc. Creates an instant alarm if tripped during the AWAY arm
mode. This zone type IS NOT ACTIVE during the STAY, STAY INSTANT, NITE, and NITE INSTANT arm modes.
05 Burglar Interior Follower - For motions detectors, interior doors, etc. which may be in the keypad or entry pathway.
If an entry delay zone is violated first, this zone will delay (Follow) also, otherwise it will create an instant alarm.
This zone type IS NOT ACTIVE during the STAY, STAY INSTANT, NITE, and NITE INSTANT arm modes.
06 Burglar Interior Nite - For motion detectors, interior doors, etc. which are not close to sleeping areas. The primary
use of this zone type is for increased security when the user is home. Interior Nite zones ARE ACTIVE during the
NITE and NITE INSTANT arm modes as well as the AWAY arm mode and will create an instant alarm if tripped.
This zone type is NOT ACTIVE during the STAY or STAY INSTANT arm modes.
07 Burglar Interior Nite Delay - For motion detectors, interior doors, etc. that are not close to sleeping areas. Same
as an Interior Nite zone except that Interior Nite Delay zones will delay for the entry/exit delay 1 time period. Interior
Nite zones ARE ACTIVE during the NITE and NITE INSTANT arm modes providing increased security when the
user is home and in bed. However, if the user accidentally wanders into a Nite Delay zone the entry delay timer
will start and the tone will sound, warning the user to disarm before a false alarm occurs.
NOTE: If “Auto Stay,No Exit” is set to YES (see Area Definitions) and the system is armed in the Away
mode, all interior zones will be bypassed if no exit is detected from the premises during the exit delay time.
Away Stay Stay Instant Nite
Nite Instant
Burg Entry/Exit (1 or 2) Zone
A
A
AN
A
AN
QUICK VIEW OF ARMING MODES
Burg Perimeter (Instant) Zone
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
This illustrates the condition of Burg
Burglar Burg Interior Zone
AN
zone types in the various arm modes.
Burg Interior Follower Zone
A
Legend: A = Armed
Burg Interior Nite Zone
AN
AN
AN
“-” = Not Armed,
Burg Interior Nite Delay Zone
A
A
AN
AN = Armed, No Delay
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Page 30
Burglar 24 hr - Intended for tamper switches, etc. Activates an immediate Burglary alarm if tripped anytime
(during armed or disarmed state).
Burglar 24 hr Box Tamper - Intended for control, siren, and bell box tamper switches. Activates an immediate
Burglary Tamper alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed state).
Fire 24 hr Alarm - Intended for Fire alarm sensors such as smoke detectors, heat stats, pull stations, etc.
Activates an immediate Fire alarm upon a short across the zone wires. A Fire Trouble will be activated if an open
(break in the zone wires) should occur.
Fire 24 hr ‘Verified’ - For smoke detectors in high-risk false alarm areas. Upon initial activation (short across the
zone), the control ignores the alarm and removes smoke power for 5 seconds to reset the detectors. During this 5
seconds, and for 20 additional seconds afterwards, no alarms will be recognized from this zone. Following this is
a 60 second verification time window, during which any additional activation will be regarded as verification of the
initial alarm and the control will initiate a Fire Alarm. If the 60 seconds expires with no further activations, the entire
process is cleared (reset). A Fire Trouble will be activated if an open (break in the zone wires) occurs.
Fire 24 hr Supervisory - Intended for monitoring water control valves on fire sprinkler systems. Same as Fire 24hr
except that a short across the zone activates a Fire Supervisory alarm. A Fire Trouble will be activated if an open
(break in the zone wires) should occur.
Auxiliary1 24 hr - This zone can trip anytime (armed or disarmed) and send a communicator report, but there is
no audible alarm output or keypad indication provided. It is displayed in the event log. A Whenever/And/Then rule
can be written from the RP software to do other things with this zone type. Resets upon restoral.
Auxiliary2 24 hr - This zone can trip anytime (armed or disarmed) and send a communicator report, but there is
no audible alarm output or keypad indication provided. It is displayed in the event log. A Whenever/And/Then rule
can be written from the RP software to do other things with this zone type. Resets upon restoral.
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 05 - Zone Definitions (continued)
Def Zone Description
Operating Characteristics
15 † Keyfob - Used when a wireless keyfob is enrolled into a receiver at this zone ID location.
16 Non Alarm - Intended for use in Whenever/And/Then rules from the Remote Programming RP software. This zone
type DOES NOT ACTIVATE any alarm and is not logged in the Event log. No reset is required.
17 †† Carbon Monoxide 24 hr - Activates an immediate Carbon Monoxide alarm if tripped anytime (armed or
disarmed). The keypad will display the alarm as well as the event log. This type of alarm can be silenced/reset
with a valid User Code. The audible alarm can be set in “Cutoff Timers”.
18 Emergency 24 hr - Similar to Def 17, this zone creates an alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
19 †† Freeze Alarm 24 hr - Similar to Def 17, this zone creates an alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
20 †† Gas Alarm 24 hr - Similar to Def 17, this zone creates an alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
21 †† Heat Alarm 24 hr - Similar to Def 17, this zone creates an alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
22 Medical Alarm 24 hr - Activates an immediate Medical alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
23 Police Alarm w/Indication 24 hr - Activates an audible Police (Holdup) alarm if tripped (armed or disarmed).
24 Police Alarm no Indication 24 hr - Activates an non-audible Police (Silent) alarm if tripped (armed or disarmed).
25 †† Water Alarm 24 hr - Activates an immediate Water alarm if tripped anytime (armed or disarmed).
26 Keyswitch Momentary - Intended for a spring loaded momentary key switch. Toggles the armed state (disarmed/
armed) with each trip.
27 Keyswitch Momentary - Away Mode - Intended for a spring loaded momentary key switch. Arms the area in the
AWAY mode with each trip.
28 Keyswitch Momentary - Stay Mode - Intended for a spring loaded momentary key switch. Arms the area in the
STAY mode with each trip.
29 Keyswitch Momentary - Disarm Only - For a spring loaded momentary key switch. Disarms with each trip.
30 Keyswitch On/Off (Maintained) - Intended for a 2 position On/Off key switch. Arms the area in Open position.
Disarms the area in the Closed position.
31 †† Mute All Area Audibles - For silencing all area audibles by a two-way listen-in module (other manufacturer).
32 Power Supervisory 24 hr - For supervising an external power supply which provides alarm/trouble contacts. Wire
the power supply contacts to open the zone in a Low Battery event and short the zone in an AC Failure event.
33 † Temperature - For use with ELK-M1ZTS Temperature Sensors. Requires the use of Whenever/And/Then rules
from the ELK-RP software. NOTE: This definition is for ZONES 1 thru 16 ONLY! Temperature zones must be set
to FAST LOOP (less that 200ms) response.
34 † Analog - For sensors that produce a variable voltage (0 to 12 volt range). Requires the Whenever/And/Then
rules from the ELK-RP software. NOTE: This definition is only available with the ELK-M1G (Gold) control.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
ZN001 02:Type=0r
0=EOL Supervised
Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Refers to the wiring configuration for zones. Burglar and Keyswitch zones may be set to:
0, 1, 2, 3, & 4. Other non-fire zones may be set to: 0, 1 or 2 only. Fire zones may be
5=EOL Supervised 4-wire detectors, 6=EOL Supervised 2-wire detectors (zone 16 ONLY!)
Wiring Configuration
Operating Description
EOL Supervised, 2,200 Ohm resistor (Zones 1 - 16 are defaulted to Type=0)
Normally Closed only. No resistor required.
Normally Open only. No resistor required.
EOL Supervised with SECURITY ALERT on Short. (Burglar & Keyswitch Zones Only) When control is disarmed a
Security “Day” Alert will occur if the zone wiring is SHORTED. Keypads will beep and display the alert and zone
name. Press Star key to silence. User code must be entered to reset/acknowledge the alert. When control is
armed an alarm will occur regardless of whether the zone wiring is OPENED or SHORTED.
EOL Supervised - 4 State Wiring, with SECURITY ALERT on Open or Short. (Burglar & Keyswitch Zones Only)
Effective with firmware 4.3.5 this type provides 4 State Zone Wiring option, which uses 2 series EOL resistors, 1 in
series with the loop and 1 in parallel with the alarm contacts. When control is disarmed a Security “Day” Alert will
occur if the zone wiring is OPENED (tamper switch) or SHORTED. Keypad(s) will beep and display the alert and
zone name. Ideal for tampering motions, etc. Press Star key to silence. User code must be entered to reset/
acknowledge the alert. When control is armed an alarm will occur regardless of whether the zone is OPENED or
SHORTED.
NOTE: To define additional output/options on types 3 & 4 use the ElkRP Whenever/Then rules.
Fire, 4-Wire Smoke Detector with 2,200 Ohm EOL resistor. Trouble on open, alarm on short. (Zones 1 to 16).
Fire, 2-wire Smoke Detector with 820 Ohm EOL resistor. (ZONE 16 ONLY)
†
Wireless transmitter zones set as Type 0 will provide both tamper and alarm notification while armed. Setting as a Type 3 or 4
adds tamper activation duriing the disarmed state as well. Setting as Type 1 disables tamper from that wireless zone/sensor.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
ZN001 03:Area=1 r
[Area Name]
Enter the area (partition) number that this zone is to be assigned to. A zone can only
reside in one area and fire zones can only reside in Area 1.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
Page 31
Menu 05 - Zone Definitions (continued)
Zone Definitions
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 04: =No
Silent Alarm
r
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 05: =Yes
Dialer Delay
r
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 06: =No
r
Enable Listen-In
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 07: =No
r
Zone Bypassable
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 08: =No
Force Armable
r
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 09: =No
r
SwingerShutdown
ZN001 10: =No
r
Req PeriodicTrip
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 11: =No
r
FastLoopResponse
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 12: =No
Enable Chime
r
ZN001 13: =No
r
In CrossZonePool
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
ZN001 14:Namel
Zone 001
Description of Option
A zone programmed ‘Yes’ for Silent Alarm will not cause any audible alarm event from a
programmable output OR from any keypad. However, a visual display will occur on the
keypad(s) which are assigned to the same area as the zone.
Helps reduce false alarm dispatches. Upon an alarm this zone the communicator will
delay dialing for the “Dialer Delay” time in Menu 09-Area Reporting Codes. If a valid code
is entered before the delay expires, report will ABORT. The communicator will transmit an
Alarm Abort code if programmed in Menu 09. NOTE: Dialer Delay Time will only start
once per alarm, regardless of additional zone trips. Default No.
† Allows zone to trigger a listen-in session after alarm is reported. Control will hold the
line for 60 seconds after ‘kiss-off’, allowing Central Station to enter *55* to activate listenin. The Central Station can renew or terminate listen-in remotely. NOTE: Two-Way must
be enabled (Menu 07-Globals) and an interface (ELK-M1TWI) with one or more
microphone/speakers (ELK-M1TWS) must be installed. Default setting is No.
A Yes allows zone to be manually bypassed. A bypassed zone will be ignored by the
system. Burglar zone bypasses are cancelled upon a disarm. To bypass a zone: Press
the Bypass key + [zone number] + the Bypass key once again. Default setting is Yes.
†† Force Arm allows a violated zone to be temporarily bypassed upon arming. Prior to
arm, the READY light blinks if force arm zone(s) are the only zones violated. The keypad
will display READY FORCE. Force arm zone(s) automatically return to service if they
become normal while armed. CAUTION! Force arm operates uniquely on entry/exit
zones! - Entry/Exit zones that are also force armable can be violated during the exit delay
and still become force armed, allowing a user to arm, open a garage door, back out, and
close the door at their leisure, without creating a false alarm and without a long exit delay
time. As soon as the garage door is closed, it will return to service. Default setting is No.
†† Prevents a runaway communicator by shunting zone after 2 trips. Zone cannot send
another alarm until control is reset OR a 48 hour time period elapses. Default No.
This type zone must be tripped at least once per disarm cycle*. This prevents blocked
PIRs or seldom used doors from being left not secure. Keypad will display “Not Ready” if
a periodic zone has not been tripped. * NOTE: A periodic trip will not be required for a
disarm period of 1 hour or less. Default setting is No.
Response is the time the zone must be violated before the system detects it. If No, the
zone responds to the Slow response time. The time values are in milliseconds and they
are programmed in the Menu 07 Global Sys. Definitions menu. Default setting is No.
NOTE: Slow loop response shall NOT be used on Fire zones.
Each zone may be selected to be included in the Chime annunciation whenever Chime
Mode is turned on from the keypad. Most zone types may be included via this option.
Default setting is No.
†† Burglar zones “In CrossZonePool” can’t cause alarms unless another zone in the pool
also activates within a time window OR unless “Cross Zone Self Ver“ [Menu 07 - Global
System Definitions] is enabled. DO NOT program Entry/exit zones as Cross zones.
Default is No. NOTE: The Cross Zone feature shall NOT be used on Fire zones.
To program the text description of the Zone Name (max. of 16 characters) press the left
arrow key. Enter text using the number keys. I.E. For a “K” press the 5 key twice. To
move the cursor press the right or left arrow keys. While programming the text, pressing
the Chime key inserts a space and the Bypass key erases 1 digit. The up and down
arrow keys move between upper and lower case. Press the ELK key when complete.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 32
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
M1G Installation and Programming
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
06-Alarm Cutoff
Timers
r
Menu 06 - Alarm Duration Timers
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Each alarm type has a cutoff timer. Any output(s) activated by the alarm type will turn off when the cutoff timer expires.
If multiple alarm types are assigned to a single output, all alarms must turn off before the output can turn off. Range is
00000 to 65535 seconds. 00000=Never turn on. 65535=Never turn off NOTE: 65535 sec = 1,092 minutes or 18.2 hrs.
Alarm Cutoff Timers
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
CT01:=00600 secr
BurgDuration
Description of Option
††† Burglar Alarm duration time in seconds. Default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). Burglar
always activates Siren/Voice Output (Out1) and Siren Output (Out2). Additional outputs
may be programmed using the RP software “Rules” function.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Fire Alarm duration time in seconds. Default time is 65535 sec. (never cutoff). Fire always
activates Siren/Voice Output (Out1) and Siren Output (Out2). Additional outputs may be
programmed using the RP software “Rules” function.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Medical Alarm duration time in seconds. Default is 00600 sec. (10 min.). Medical always
activates Siren/Voice Output (Out1) and Siren Output (Out2). Additional outputs may be
programmed using the RP software “Rules” function.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Audible Police Alarm duration time in seconds. Default time is 00600 sec. (10 min).
Audible Police always activates Siren/Voice Output (Out1) and Siren Output (Out2).
Additional outputs may be programmed using the RP software “Rules” function.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
CO (Carbon Monoxide) Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10
min.). This alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules”
function must be used to assign outputs.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Emergency Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.).
This alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must
be used to assign outputs.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Freeze Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This
alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be
used to assign outputs.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Gas Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This alarm
type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be used
to assign outputs.
CT02:=00000 secr
FireDuration
CT03:=00600 secr
Med Duration
CT04:=00600 secr
Pol Duration
CT05:=00600 secr
CO Duration
CT06:=00600 secr
EmerDuration
CT07:=00600 secr
FrezDuration
CT08:=00600 secr
Gas Duration
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
CT09:=00600 secr
HeatDuration
Heat Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This alarm
type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be used
to assign outputs.
CT10:=00600 secr
WatrDuration
Water Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This
alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be
used to assign outputs.
CT11:=00600 secr
Aux1Duration
Aux 1 Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This
alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be
used to assign outputs.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
CT12:=00600 secr
Aux2Duration
Aux 2 Alarm duration time in seconds. The default time is 00600 sec. (10 min.). This
alarm type is not preassigned to any outputs. The RP software “Rules” function must be
used to assign outputs.
††† See Appendix F for UL & ULC Requirements
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 33
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
07-Global System r
Definitions
Global Sys Definitions
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Description of Option
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Telephone Remote Control allows any phone to become a basic keypad. This feature can
be set for interior use only (1), interior & exterior use (2), or disabled (0). The M1VB Voice
Module (standard on most units) is required for this feature. Default is (0) disabled.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Keypads that are programmed to show time and date on their second display line will
either display 12 hour format or 24 hour military format, depending upon this option.
Default is Yes
G01:=0 TelRmtCtl
In&OutsidTeleCtl
G02: =Yes
12Hr Time Disp
r
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G03: =No
r
DD/MM Date Disp
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
04: =No
r
Celcius TempDisp
If this option is No, the date will display as Month/Day/Year. If this option is Yes, the date
will display as Day/Month/Year. Default No.
Keypads that are programmed to show temperature on their second display line will either
display as Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending upon this option. Default is No.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The system will automatically adjust its internal clock for daylight savings time changes if
this option is set to ‘Yes’. Default is Yes.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Sets the time that a “Fast Loop” zone must remain open before the control responds. To
set, press the RIGHT arrow key and enter a number from 002 to 255. Time is adjusted in
10 millisecond increments from 20ms to 2550ms (2.55 seconds). Default is 40ms.
G05: =Yes
r
Daylight Savings
G06: =0040 ms r
Fast Loop Resp
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G07: =0400 ms r
Slow Loop Resp
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G08: =No
r
CrossZoneSelfVer
Sets the time that a “Slow Loop” zone must remain open before the control responds. A
“Slow Loop” zone is basically any zone that does not have the “FastLoopResponse”
option enabled in Menu 05 - Zone Definitions. To set, press the RIGHT arrow key and
enter a number from 002 to 255. Time is adjusted in 10 millisecond increments from
20ms to 2550ms (2.55 seconds). Default is 400ms.
Zones programmed with the ‘Cross Zone’ option may be allowed to self-verify an alarm
condition. I.E. A second trip of the same zone within the Cross Zone Verify Time window
will be considered a verified alarm. Default is No. NOTE: The Cross Zone feature shall
NOT be used on Fire zones.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G09: =030
r
CrossZoneVerTime
This timer function is the amount of time in seconds that is allowed for two or more ‘Cross
Zone” zones to verify each other in an alarm condition OR for a second trip of the same
zone when ‘CrossZoneSelfVer’ has been enabled. Default is No. NOTE: The Cross Zone
feature shall NOT be used on Fire zones.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This option selects whether ordinary non-fire system troubles will cause audible alerts to
sound. This option does not affect fire trouble conditions, which will always be audible.
Default is No.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The control supports up to 99 User codes, plus the Installer code. The User codes can be
either 4 digits in length or 6 digits, depending upon this option. Default is No (4 digits).
NOTE: The Installer code is ALWAYS 6 digits.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
To prevent a would be thief or hacker from being able to hunt for a valid user code, the
system can automatically lock out all code entry for 1 minute after a sequence of invalid
digits. The range of value can be set from 13 to 99. Default is 99.
G10: =Yes
r
Audible Troubles
G11: =No
r
6 Digit UserCode
G12:=99 Digits r
WrongCodeLockout
Page 34
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions (continued)
Global Sys Definitions
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G13:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _r
Common To Area1
Description of Option
Any of the Areas 2 thru 8 may be made common to Area 1. The result is: Area 1 cannot
be armed until all its common areas are armed. Once armed, Area 1 will disarm if any
common area becomes disarmed. This is good for lobbies or vestibules shared by two or
more persons. Each area must have its own keypad. NOTE: If you want Area 1 to
automatically arm when all its common areas become armed, use a Whenever/
And/Then rule from the RP software to do this.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Changes the Burglar Yelp sound on outputs 1 & 2 to a pulsing Buzzer sound. NOTE:
Out1 is designed for 8 Ohm - 20 watt min. speakers (up to 4 max) and has
adjustable volume settings. Default is No.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Options G15 thru G18 set the start and final volume levels for alarms and non alarms.
G15 sets the initial siren/bell volume of Output 1 upon initial alarm activation. The range of
settings is selectable from 0 to 7 (0 = lowest, 7 = loudest).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Sets the maximum siren/bell volume of Output 1. The sound starts at the initial setting
and increases (volume step) every 10 seconds until the max. is reached. Volume
stepping reduces noise and confusion with user caused false alarms. Default is 7.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G17: =5 Out1 Maxr
VoiceAlmVol-Tstr
Sets the maximum volume of Output 1 for Voice alarm messages. Just as in G16, with a
low initial setting, the voice alarm message starts low and automatically increases
(volume stepping) over a period of time until the max. is reached. Default is 5.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Sets the maximum volume of Output 1 for Voice non-alarm messages. Non-alarm
messages consist of system status, zone status, and various operating helpful hints that
are produced for the user during non-alarm conditions. Default is 2.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Selects whether or not voice messages are to be spoken through Output 1. Selecting
‘Yes” completely eliminates all spoken voice messages from Output 1. Selecting “No”
allows voices to be spoken based upon the settings of G20 through G25. Default is No.
G14: =No Out1&2r
Chg YelpToBuzzer
G15:=1 Out1Startr
Alarm Volum-Tstr
G16:=7 Out1 Maxr
Siren Volum-Tstr
G18: =2 Out1 Nonr
AlmVoiceVol-Tstr
G19:=No Out1 r
SuppressAllVoice
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G20:=Yes Out1 r
SaySystmMessages
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G21:=Yes Out1 r
Say Alarms
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G22:=Yes Out1 r
Say Zone Status
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G23:=Yes Out1 r
SaySystemTrouble
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G24:=Yes Out1 r
Say Zone Trouble
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G25:=Yes Out1 r
Say Chime
Selects whether System “non-alarm” messages will be spoken through Output 1. System
messages include: “System is Armed”, “System is Disarmed”, etc. Default is Yes.
Selects whether Alarm messages will be spoken through Output 1.
Selects whether Zone status messages will be spoken through Output 1.
Selects whether System Trouble messages will be spoken through Output 1.
Selects whether Zone Trouble messages will be spoken through Output 1.
Selects whether Chime Event messages will be spoken through Output 1.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 35
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions (continued)
Global Sys Definitions
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G26: =No
r
Out2 Voltage Out
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G27:=000secOut2r
Delay Turn-On
Description of Option
Allows Output 2 to be converted from a siren driver into a voltage only output. If set to
“No” the control produces alarm sounds for use with 8 Ohm speakers. If set to “Yes” the
control will produce +12 Volts for use with self-contained sirens or bells. Default is No.
Ordinarily, Outputs 1 & 2 activate immediately on alarms. However, Output 2 can be time
delayed up to 255 seconds. Using Output 1 strictly for interior sounders and Output 2 for
outside sounders, a false alarm will be heard inside first, giving the user time to disarm
before any outside sounders are activated. A “good neighbor” feature. Default is 000.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
† Output 2 can be set to alarm only once per armed cycle for burglary type alarms. This
feature is intended for noise abatement. The dialer will continue to transmit all alarms that
may occur. THIS ONLY LOCKS OUT AUDIBLE FROM OUTPUT 2.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The control must be set to auto answer an incoming call in order for Telephone Remote
Control or the Remote Programming (RP) to be accessed remotely. The range of rings
can be set from 1 to 15. A value of “0” disables auto answer.
G28:=No Out2 r
SingleAlmLockout
G29:=00 Rings r
Until AutoAnswer
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G30:=No
r
Ring/Hang/Answer
A Yes enables faster connection from an outside telephone. It works as follows: Call the
control and hang up after 1 or 2 rings. This starts a 45 second timer. Call the control a
2nd time during this 45 second time and the control will answer on the first ring. In some
cases this Ring/Hang/Answer option may be the only way to get around telephone
company provided answering services. Option 29 MUST also be set!
NOTE: If an on-site answering machine picks up, the RP software and the control
will automatically attempt to override the machine using tone sniffing methods.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G31:=No
2Wayr
Listen-In Enable
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
† If this option to Yes ONLY when an ELK-M1TWI Two Way Listen-In interface is
installed. This enables the correct software commands and procedures to make the two
way functional. Refer also to the instructions that are shipped with the ELK-M1TWI
G32:=00sec 2Wayr
CallbackTime
If Two Way is enabled, this timer provides a window for the CS to enter * 55 * and activate
two way listen-in by holding the phone line off-hook for 001 to 255 seconds after a kissoff.
Upon hangup, this timer re-starts to provide a window for the CS to callback and initiate
two way. Control will answer an incoming call on the first ring. Enter 000 to disable.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Allows the Central Station alarm verification by suspending (holding) new alarms after the
initial alarm kissoff. The phone line is kept free for this time period. The time value can be
from 001 to 255 seconds. Long time periods are not recommended. Enter 000 to disable.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This location is used to set the “revert back to” baud rate for the on-board RS-232 serial
port which is Port 0. The available selections are: 0 or 1=300 baud, 2=1200, 3=2400,
4=4800, 5=9600, 6=14400, 7=19200, 8=38400, and 9=115200. Factory default: 115,200.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The control can transmit ASCII data via it’s RS-232 port to automation types of equipment.
The ELK ASCII Protocol document is available upon request. This first option sets the
control to transmit all event log information immediately as it occurs.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This option sets the control to transmit zone status changes immediately as they occur.
The ELK ASCII Protocol document is available upon request.
G33:=000sec CSr
Verify Call Time
G34:=9 115200r
Baud Rate Port 0
G35:=No Xmitr
Event Log- ASCII
G36:=No Xmitr
Zone Chgs - ASCII
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
G37:=No Xmitr
OutputChgs-ASCII
This option sets the control to transmit output status changes immediately as they occur.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 36
†† Not for use in UL Listed Systems
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions (continued)
Global Sys Def
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G38:=No Xmitr
Task Chgs - ASCII
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G39:=No Xmitr
Light Chgs-ASCII
Description of Option
† This option sets the control to transmit automation task status changes immediately as
they occur.
† This option sets the control to transmit automation lighting status changes immediately
as they occur.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G40:=No Xmitr
Keypad Key Chgs
Sets the control to transmit keypad key changes. This includes the Chime, Bypass, Exit,
Stay keys, the ELK key and it’s surrounding arrow keys, and the F keys. It does not
transmit any of the numeric keys..
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G41:=No Require
Code UserMenu1-5
Allows User Menus 1 through 5 to be blocked from view until a valid User code is entered.
If set to “Yes”, only User Codes which have the “Menu 1-5 Allowed” option enabled will be
able to view or access Menus 1 through 5. Default is No.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
This is the 6 digit Installer program code that is required in order to access the local
installer programming mode. NOTE: Be careful when changing this code as it will be
impossible to program the panel if the code is programmed wrong or forgotten.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
This is a read-only location. Each control is assigned a unique serial number for
identification of the unit regarding warranty, technical support, anti-takeover, and other
issues that may arise.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
This is a read-only location displaying information about the current software and
bootloader revision that the control is operating with. This will only be needed with the
assistance of a factory technical support person.
G42:=172839
r
Local Prog Code
G43:=D1234567
Serial Number
r
G44:xxxxxxxxxxxx
Axxxxxx Bxxxxxx
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
G45:=DefaultCtl r
81=User Codes
Allows factory default values to be restored by individual menus/categories. Press the
right arrow, then press the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the choices. To factory
default any single category enter the displayed number. E.G., enter 81 from this screen to
default all User Codes. Be patient as it may take a minute or more to default some items.
82=Areas Data
Entering 82 from this screen causes all area definitions to be factory defaulted.
83=Keypads Data
Entering 83 from this screen causes all keypad definitions to be factory defaulted.
84=Zones Data
Entering 84 from this screen causes all zone definitions to be factory defaulted.
85=Zone Names
Entering 85 from this screen causes all zone names to be factory defaulted.
86=CutoffTimes
Entering 86 from this screen causes all the cutoff timers to be factory defaulted.
87=Global Data
Entering 87 from this screen causes all global system defs to be factory defaulted.
88=TeleAcct Data
Entering 88 from this screen causes all telephone reporting setup to be factory defaulted.
89=Tele #’s Only
Entering 89 from this screen causes all telephone numbers ONLY to be factory defaulted.
90=AreaRptCodes
Entering 90 from this screen causes all area report codes to be factory defaulted.
91=ZoneRptCodes
Entering 91 from this screen causes all zone report codes to be factory defaulted.
92=SysRptCodes
Entering 92 from this screen causes all system report codes to be factory defaulted.
93=UserRptCodes
Entering 93 from this screen causes all user report codes to be factory defaulted.
94=VoiceMessages
Entering 94 from this screen causes all voice messages to be factory defaulted.
95=WirelessDef
Entering 95 from this screen causes all wireless definitions to be factory defaulted.
99=Entire Panel
Entering 99 from this screen causes the entire panel programming to be factory defaulted.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 37
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
08-Telephone
r
Account Setup
Telephone Acct Setup
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: Selb
Prgr
[Name for Tel#1]
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 01:Format=0 r
0=Disabled
Menu 08 - Telephone Account Setup
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Description of Option
The control can dial up to 8 telephone numbers plus the ELK-RP number. Each of the 8
phone numbers can be used to report alarms, troubles, closings, opening, etc. in digital
format as well as pager formats. Use the up/down arrow keys to select the telephone
number, then press the right arrow key to program the options, starting with option 01.
This selects the reporting format to be used with this number. The available formats are:
00 = Disable reporting
03 = Pulse 4+2
06 = Ethernet
01 = Contact ID
04 = Pager DTMF tones
02 = SIA
05 = † Voice Message
Note: Voice Message Format can only be utilized from the Elk-RP Computer software in
concert with a Whenever/And/Then rule.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 02: = 0
r
0=Always Report
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 03:Num=
0=Always Report, meaning the number will be dialed when its “report to” options are
activated. 1=Backup, meaning the number will ONLY be dialed if the previous sequential
number failed to complete its call. When backup is selected the “report to” options will be
copied from the previous number and ONLY the name, number, format, and dial attempts
may be edited. To edit any “report to” options you must temporarily set this value to 0.
NOTE: Telephone # 1 cannot be set as a backup since it is the first number. A
backup cannot have another backup.
Up to 20 digits may be entered for a telephone number. Valid numeric digits are: 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 0. In addition, the following special characters may be programmed.
The cursor automatically moves right each time a digit is entered.
Comma (,) = forces the dialer to pause for 2 seconds
Slash (/) = forces the dialer to pause for 125 milliseconds.
Asterick (*) = simulates the * key on a touch tone phone
Pound (#) = simulates the # key on a touch tone phone
B = Program the 1st dialed digit as a “B” to force Pulse (rotary) dialing. Elsewhere in dial string a “B” will be handled as a
DTMF tone signal
C = Not Used
D = Program the 1st dialed digit as a “D” to force Dial tone detection prior to dialing. Otherwise, it dials regardless of dial
tone presence. Anywhere else in the dial string a “D” will simply be handled as a DTMF tone signal. EXCEPTION:
Digit D (Dial tone detect) can be the 2nd digit but ONLY if B (Pulse dial) is the 1st dialed digit.
To enter special characters place the cursor where desired and press the up arrow key. The 1 key produces
characters 1, #, *, and /. The 2 key produces 2, A, B, and C. The 3 key produces 3, and D. When finished press the
down arrow key to return to numbers.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This sets the number of dial attempts (re-dials) that the communicator will make to this
number before a Comm Fail (fail to report) is logged. Valid range is 01 to 15 attempts.
Default is 08.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 05:=000000r
Acct # for Area1
The Account number for Area 1 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 06:=000000r
Acct # for Area2
The Account number for Area 2 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The Account number for Area 3 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
T1: 04: = 08
Dial Attempts
r
T1: 07:=000000r
Acct # for Area3
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 38
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 08 Telephone Account Setup (continued)
Telephone Acct Setup
Description of Option
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T1: 08:=000000r
Acct # for Area4
The Account number for Area 4 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T1: 09:=000000r
Acct # for Area5
The Account number for Area 5 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T1: 10:=000000r
Acct # for Area6
The Account number for Area 6 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T1: 11:=000000r
Acct # for Area7
The Account number for Area 7 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
The Account number for Area 8 (up to 6 digits) when it is reported to this telephone
number. Since all 6 digits must be entered, enter leading zeros (0’s) if a shorter account
number is required.
T1: 12:=000000r
Acct # for Area8
THE FOLLOWING 5 OPTIONS DEFINE WHAT IS REPORTED BY THIS TELEPHONE #
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
T1: 13:=Yes Rptr
AreaAlms,RestUnbp
This YES or NO option identifies whether this telephone number should report misc.
options from the AREA REPORTING CODES menu, Zone Alarms, Restores, and
Unbypasses from the ZONE REPORTING CODES menu, and Keypad Alarms from the
KEYPAD F-KEY REPORTING CODES menu.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This YES or NO option identifies whether this telephone number should report the Zone
Bypasses from the ZONE REPORTING CODES menu.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This YES or NO option identifies whether this telephone number should report the Zone
Troubles from the ZONE REPORTING CODES menu.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This YES or NO option identifies whether this telephone number should report the user
opening and closing codes from the USER REPORTING CODES menu.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
This YES or NO option identifies whether this telephone number should report the global
system event codes from SYS REPORT OPTIONS & CODES menu.
T1: 14:=No Rptr
Bypasses
T1: 15:=No Rptr
Zone Troubles
T1: 16:=No Rptr
User ReportCodes
T1: 17:=Yes Rptr
Global SysEvents
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T1: 18:Name
l
[Name for Tel#1]
To edit or program a text description name (max. of 16 characters) such as “ACME
Central Station” for the Telephone number press left arrow key. Spell out the text using
the number keys. I.E. For a “K” press the 5 key twice. To move the cursor press the right
or left arrow keys. While programming the text, pressing the Chime key inserts a space,
and the Bypass key erases 1 digit. The up and down arrow keys toggles between upper
and lower case. Press the ELK key when complete.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 39
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
09-Area Reporting
Codes
r
Menu 09 - Area Reporting Codes
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
NOTE: Enter a two digit value to enable a particular report code. To disable a report code enter 00. When SIA or
Contact ID is the reporting format, the two digit value can simply be 01 since the control automatically produces the
correct code according to the SIA or Contact ID protocol. For 4+2 pulse format, enter a value from 01 to FF. To enter
the A thru F HEX characters press the RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor under the desired digit, then press the UP
arrow (shift) key once. Each press of the 2 key will now produce the following: 2, A, B, C. Each press of the 3 key will
now produce the following: 3, D, E, F. Press the RIGHT arrow key to cancel shift and move to the next character. See
Appendix for a summary of the SIA and Contact ID codes.
Area Report Codes
Description of Option
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Each of the eight (8) Areas has specific communicator reporting codes for events that only
occur within that area. Using the up/down arrow keys, select the appropriate area, then
press the right arrow key to begin starting with option 01.
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Dialer Delay Time is an amount of time following an alarm during which the report may be
aborted if the area is disarmed by a valid user. An optional alarm abort code may be
programmed to report. Range is 000 to 255 seconds. Default is 000 (delay disabled).
AR1: Selb
Prgr
ReportCodesArea1
AR1 01:000=Sec r
Dialer Delay Time
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
AR1 02:Code= 00r
Alm Abort Code
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
AR1 03:000=Sec r
CancelWindowTime
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
AR1 04:Code= 00r
Alm Cancel Code
Alarm Abort code is an optional code that may be reported when an alarm is aborted
during the Comm Abort Time window. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Cancel Window Time is the time following an alarm during which a cancel code will be
reported if the area is disarmed. Cancel is not the same as abort since the alarm has
already reported. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Alarm Cancel code is the code that will be reported if the area in alarm is disarmed within
the Cancel Window Time. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Close Automatic code will be reported anytime the area is armed automatically by a Rule
from the RP software programming. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming
instructions. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Close Early code will be reported if the area is closed prior to a programmed Expected
Arm time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Close Extended code will be reported if a programmed Expected Arm time is extended by
a valid user. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Fail to Close code will be reported if the area is not armed by a programmed Expected
Arm time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
AR1 09:Code= 00r
Late Close
Late to Close code will be reported if the area is armed after a programmed Expected Arm
time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF. Default
is 00 (no report).
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Keyswitch Close code will be reported in place of a user code whenever the area is armed
by a keyswitch. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to
FF. Default is 00 (no report).
AR1 05:Code= 00r
Close Automatic
AR1 06:Code= 00r
Close Early
AR1 07:Code= 00r
Close Extended
AR1 08:Code= 00r
Fail To Close
AR1 10:Code= 00r
Keyswitch Close
Page 40
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 09 - Area Reporting Codes (continued)
Area Report Codes
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 11:Code= 00r
Duress Code
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 12:Code= 00r
Open After Alrm
Description of Option
Duress code will be reported if the area is armed or disarmed by a valid user code that is
programmed with the duress attribute. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Open After Alarm code will be reported whenever a valid user arrives and disarms the area
following an alarm activation. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 13:Code= 00r
Open Early
Open Early code will be reported if the area is disarmed prior to a programmed Expected
Disarm time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 14:Code= 00r
Fail To Open
Fail to Open code will be reported if the area is not disarmed by a programmed Expected
Disarm time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Open Late code will be reported if the area is disarmed after a programmed Expected
Disarm time. Refer to the ELK-RP Rules Programming instructions. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Open Keyswitch code will be reported in place of a user code whenever the area is
disarmed by a Keyswitch zone. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
User Lockout code will be reported if someone repeatedly enters digits (see Menu 07 Global System Definitions, Option 12 for the maximum number of digits allowed) in an
attempt to hack out a valid user code. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
AR1 15:Code= 00r
Open Late
AR1 16:Code= 00r
Open Keyswitch
AR1 17:Code= 00r
User Lockout
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 18:Code= 00r
Exit Error
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
AR1 19:Code= 00r
Fail Communicate
Exit Error Code can be used to identify an accidental alarm caused by an error while
arming. Locally, it works as follows: If an exit delay rolls directly into entry delay as a
result of a zone being left violated, the entry delay warning AND the siren will sound. If the
control is not disarmed prior to the entry delay expiring, the communicator will report the
alarm along with the Exit Error code. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Fail to communicate displays on the keypad and the event log when the communicator
fails to complete it’s report using the number of dial attempts. A good communications
report must occur in order to reset/clear the failure. If this fail to communicate report code
is enabled, it will be reported with next good communications to indicate a “past” failure.
Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Based on the event, the CID (Contact ID) or SIA Codes for Area Reporting Codes will be:
Area RCs
Alarm Abort
Alarm Cancel
Automatic Close
Early Close
Closing Extended
Fail To Close
Late Close
Key Switch Close
Duress
CID
406
406
403
451
464
454
452
409
121
SIA
OC
OC
CA
CK
CE
CI
CJ
CS
HA
Area RCs
Open After Alarm
Early Open
Fail To Open
Late Open
Key Switch Open
Keypad Locked Out
Exit Error
Fail To Communicate
CID
450
451
453
452
409
461
457
354
SIA
OR
OK
OI
OJ
OS
JA
EE
RT
NOTE: On CID reporting the 3 digit code will be preceded by a “1” for a new event or
an opening. It will be preceded by a “3” for a restore or a closing event.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 41
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
10-Zone Reportng
Codes
r
Menu 10 - Zone Reporting Codes
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
NOTE: Enter a two digit value to enable a report code. To disable a report code enter 00. When SIA or Contact ID is the
reporting format, the two digit value can simply be 01 since the control automatically produces the correct code
according to the SIA or Contact ID protocol. For 4+2 pulse format, enter a value from 01 to FF. To enter the A thru F
HEX characters press the RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor under the desired digit, then press the UP arrow (shift)
key once. Each press of the 2 key will now produce the following: 2, A, B, C. Each press of the 3 key will now produce
the following: 3, D, E, F. Press the RIGHT arrow key to cancel shift and move to the next character. See Appendix for
a summary of the SIA and Contact ID codes.
Zone Report Codes
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Z001: Selb Prgr
[Name of Zone]
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
Z001:A=00 R=00 r
Byp=00 Tbl=00
Description of Option
Each of the 208 Zones has specific communicator reporting codes for Alarm, Restore,
Bypass, and Trouble. Using the up/down arrow keys, select the appropriate zone, then
press the right arrow key to begin programming of that zone.
The cursor starts at the 00 beside A (Alarm). Enter the desired two digit reporting code
and press the right arrow key to advance to the R (Restore). To jump the cursor to another
report without changing this one simply press the right arrow key. The next press of the
right arrow key after Tbl (Trouble) will advance the screen back to the beginning of that
zone. Range is 00 to FF. Default for all entries is 00 (no report).
NOTE: Each reporting code must be programmed according to the desired reporting
format. However, for SIA and Contact ID formats the actual reporting digits will be
produced by the control according to the type of alarm or event. The only programming
required to enable reporting with the SIA and Contact ID formats is to set the programmed
code to a non zero (0) value. See below:
Based on the zone definition, the CID (Contact ID) or SIA formats for Zone Reporting Codes will be:
Zone RCs
01 = Burglar Entry/Exit 1
02 = Burglar Entry/Exit 2
03 = Burglar Perim Inst
04 = Burglar Interior
05 = Burglar Int Follower
06 = Burglar Int Night
07 = Burglar Int Nt Fllwr
08 = Burglar 24 Hour
09 = Burglar Box Tamper
10 = Fire Alarm
11 = Fire Verified
12 = Fire Supervisory
13 = Aux Function 1
14 = Aux Function 2
15 = Keyfob
16 = Non Alarm
17 = Carbon Monoxide
Alarms
CID SIA
134 BA
134 BA
131 BA
132 BA
132 BA
135 BA
135 BA
133 BA
137 TA
110 FA
110 FA
200 FS
150 UA
150 UA
---- ------- ---162 GA
Restore
CID SIA
134 B R
134 B R
131 B R
132 B R
132 B R
135 B R
135 B R
133 B R
137 T R
110 F R
110 F R
200 F R
150 U R
150 U R
---- ------- ---162 GR
Bypass
CID SIA
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 BB
573 TB
571 FB
571 FB
571 FB
572 UB
572 UB
---- ------- ---572 GB
Trouble
CID SIA
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
370 BT
373 FT
373 FT
373 FT
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ----
Zone RCs
18 = Emergency Alarm
19 = Freeze Alarm
20 = Gas Alarm
21 = Heat Alarm
22 = Medical Alarm
23 = Police Alarm
24 = Police No Indication
25 = Water Alarm
26 = Key Mom Arm/Disarm
27 = Key Mom Arm Away
28 = Key Mom Arm Stay
29 = Key Mom Disarm
30 = Key On/Off
31 = Mute Audibles
32 = Power Supervisory
33 = Temperature
34 = Analog Zone
Alarms
CID SIA
101 QA
159 Z A
151 GA
114 KA
100 MA
120 P A
120 P A
154 WA
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ---338 YT
---- ------- ----
Restore
CID SIA
101 Q R
159 Z R
151 G R
114 K R
100 M R
120 P H
120 H H
154 WR
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ---338 YR
---- ------- ----
Bypass
CID SIA
572 QB
572 ZB
572 GB
572 KB
572 MB
572 PB
572 PB
572 WB
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ---572 UB
---- ------- ----
Trouble
CID SIA
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ----
NOTE: On CID reporting the 3 digit code is preceded by a “1” for new events or a “3” for restore (previous reported) events.
Page 42
M1G Installation and Programming
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
11-Keypad F-Keyr
Reporting Codes
Menu 11 - Keypad F-Key Reporting Codes
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
Referring back to Menu 04-Keypad Definitions, each F Key (F1 thru F6) can be programmed to activate a specific event.
If the programmed “activate event” is an alarm such as: Burg, Fire, Medical, Police Panic, etc., then it is possible to have
an alarm report code transmitted when an F key is used to activate that event. Enter a two digit value for the “A” alarm
report code. To disable the alarm report code enter 00. If the reporting format is SIA or Contact ID, the value can simply
be 01 because the control will automatically produces the correct code according to alarm type using the SIA or Contact
ID protocol. For 4+2 pulse format, enter a value from 01 to FF. To enter the A thru F HEX characters press the RIGHT
arrow key to position the cursor under the desired digit, then press the UP arrow (shift) key once. Each press of the 2
key will now produce the following: 2, A, B, C. Each press of the 3 key will now produce the following: 3, D, E, F.
Press the RIGHT arrow key to cancel shift and move to the next character.
F-Key Report Codes
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
FK01: A=00
r
[KP01 FKey01]
Description of Option
Each Keypad has 6 programmable F keys. This menu displays the F keys starting at
FK01 thru FK06 for Keypad 1, then FK07 thru FK13 for Keypad 2, etc. Use the UP and
DOWN arrow keys to select the appropriate keypad and key, then press the RIGHT arrow
key to programming the code. It may take some experimenting but it is possible to jump
directly to a specific keypad and key by entering a two digit number.
To program the alarm report code press the RIGHT arrow key to move the cursor into the
A= column, then enter a two digit value. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report). To
return back to the left column to select another key or keypad press the ELK key
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
FK02:A=00
[KP01 FKey02]
r
NOTE: Each reporting code must be programmed according to the desired reporting
format. However, for SIA and Contact ID formats the actual reporting digits will be
produced by the control according to the type of alarm or event. The only programming
required to enable reporting with the SIA and Contact ID formats is to set the programmed
code to a non zero (0) value. See below:
Based on the F Key Event definition, the CID (Contact ID) or SIA formats will be:
Keypad Alarm RCs
00 = Disabled
01 = Burglar Entry/Exit 1
02 = Burglar Entry/Exit 2
03 = Burglar Perim Inst
04 = Burglar Interior
05 = Burglar Int Follower
06 = Burglar Int Night
07 = Burglar Int Nt Delay
08 = Burglar 24 Hour
09 = Burglar Box Tamper
10 = Fire Alarm
11 = Fire Verified
12 = Fire Supervisory
13 = Aux1 24hr Alarm
14 = Aux2 24hr Alarm
15 = Keyfob
16 = Non-Alarm
17 = Carbon Monoxide
Alarms
CID SIA
---- ---134 BA
134 BA
131 BA
132 BA
132 BA
135 BA
135 BA
133 BA
137 TA
110 FA
110 FA
200 FS
150 UA
150 UA
---- ------- ---162 GA
Keypad Alarm RCs
18 = Emergency Alarm
19 = Freeze Alarm
20 = Gas Alarm
21 = Heat Alarm
22 = Medical Alarm
23 = Police Alarm
24 = Police No Indication
25 = Water Alarm
26 = Key Mom Arm/Disarm
27 = Key Mom Arm Away
28 = Key Mom Arm Stay
29 = Key Mom Disarm
30 = Key On/Off
31 = Mute Audibles
32 = Power Supervisory
33 = Temperature
34 = Analog
Alarms
CID SIA
101 QA
159 Z A
151 GA
114 KA
100 MA
120 P A
120 P A
154 WA
---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ---338 YT
---- ------- ----
NOTE: On CID reporting the 3 digit code will be preceded by a “1”.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 43
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12-Sys Rpt Code r
Options & Codes
Menu 12 - Sys Report Code Options & Codes
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
System Report Codes and Options are global to the entire system such as Low Battery, AC Fail, etc. Using the up/down
arrow keys, select the appropriate option, then press the right arrow key to begin programming that option.
NOTE: Enter a two digit value to enable a report code, enter 00 to disable. With SIA or Contact ID format, the two digit
value can be 01 as the control automatically inserts the correct code according to the SIA or Contact ID protocol. For
4+2 pulse format, enter 01 to FF. For A thru F HEX characters press the RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor under
the desired digit, then press the UP arrow (shift) key once. Presses of the 2 key produces the following: 2, A, B, C.
Presses of the 3 key produces the following: 3, D, E, F. Press the RIGHT arrow key to cancel shift and move to the
next character. See Appendix for a summary of the SIA and Contact ID codes.
Sys Rpt Code Options
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR01: 015=AC Fail
Rpt Delay - Minr
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR02: T=00 R=00 r
AC Fail Codes
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR03: 00 = Autor
Test Code
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR04: =00:00 r
Auto Test Hr:Min
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR05: 000=Days r
Between AutoTest
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR06: T=00 R=00 r
Aux Overcurrent
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR07: T=00 R=00 r
Exp Module Tbl
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR08: 00=Instalr
Program Begin
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
SR09: 00=Instalr
Program End
Page 44
Description of Option
Reporting of AC Fail may be delayed from 001 to 255 minutes. Default is 15 minutes.
Setting this location to 255 results in no AC failure at the keypad or reporting by the dialer.
T (Trouble) code is code reported upon AC failure, after any AC Fail Rpt delay time. R
(Restore) is code reported immediately upon restoral of the AC power. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
Auto Test code is used to verify that the telephone line and internal communications
circuitry is functioning properly. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Auto Test Hr:Min may be set to occur at any specific hour and minute, using military time
format. IE: 7:30 is AM, 19:30 is 7:30pm. Default is 00:00 (Midnight)
Can be used to skip Auto Test for a number of days, (000 to 255). A value of 000 or 001 is
one in the same, resulting in the test code being reported daily at the Auto Test time.
T (Trouble) is code reported when auxiliary power overload is detected. R (Restore) is
code reported when the overload ceases. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
T (Trouble) is code reported when an enrolled data bus module fails to respond or is
missing. R (Restore) is code reported when module is restored. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report).
Used to report when the Installer Level of Programming has been entered. Range is 00 to
FF. Default is 00 (no report).
Used to reporting when Installer Programming has ended. Report not sent until the * key
is pressed 3 time, signifying final program end. If the * key sequence is not pressed, the
report will occur automatically at Midnight. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 12 - Sys Report Code Options & Codes (continued)
Sys Rpt Code Options
Description of Option
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Log 80% Full reports whenever the Event Log becomes 80% full. Range is 00 to FF.
Default is 00 (no report). The Elk-RP is required to download the log and/or clear it.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T (Trouble) is code reported if battery test drops below 11.2 Volts. R (Restore) is code
reported once battery test passes at 11.5 Volts or higher. Range is 00 to FF. Default is
00 (no report).
SR10: 00= Logr
80% Full
SR11: T=00 R=00 r
Low Battery
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
SR12: T=00
Memory Error
r
THIS PROGRAMMING LOCATION IS NO LONGER USED
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Code reported upon completion of a Up/Download session. This can be used as a
verification that the control was accessed. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
T (Trouble) is code reported upon detection of Voltage/Current loss on the telephone line.
R (Restore) is code reported immediately upon restoral of the telephone line. Range is 00
to FF. Default is 00 (no report).
SR13: 00= Up/ r
Download End
SR14: T=00 R=00 r
Phone Line Fault
To avoid nuisance reports caused by brief phone outages caused by telephone linemen or
central office repairs, there is a 3 minute (default) time delay before telephone line fault is
annunciated and reported. The delay time is programmed from 01 to 31 seconds but
ONLY by use of the ElkRP Programming Software. [A delay of 01 is the same as 00 or
instant]
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
SR15: T=00 R=00 r
Output 2 Trouble
T (Trouble) is code reported upon an open circuit occuring on Output 2. R (Restore) is
code reported upon restoral of the connection. Range is 00 to FF. Default is 00 (no
report).
Based on the event, the CID (Contact ID) or SIA Codes for System Reporting Codes will be:
System RCs
AC Fail
AC Restore
Automatic Test
Aux Over Current
Aux Over Current Restore
Expansion Module Trouble
Expansion Module Restore
Local Programming Begin
Local Programming End
CID
301
301
602
312
312
333
333
627
628
SIA
AT
AR
RP
YP
YQ
ET
ER
LB
LX
System RCs
CID
Log 80% Full
623
Low Backup Battery
302
Low Battery Restore
302
Memory Error
304
Remote Programming End 412
Telephone Line Fault
351
Telephone Line Restore
351
Output 2 Trouble
322
Output 2 Restore
322
SIA
JL
YT
YR
YF
RS
LT
LR
YA
YH
NOTE: On CID reporting the 3 digit code is preceded by a “1” for new events
or a “3” for restore (previous reported) events.
NOTE: UL requires that a Technician be On-Site when doing Remote Programming.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 45
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
13-User
Codes
Report
r
Menu 13 - User Report Codes
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
NOTE: Enter a two digit value to enable a report code. To disable a report code enter 00. When SIA or Contact ID is the
reporting format, the two digit value can simply be 01 since the control automatically produces the correct code
according to the SIA or Contact ID protocol. For 4+2 pulse format, enter a value from 01 to FF. To enter the A thru F
HEX characters press the RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor under the desired digit, then press the UP arrow (shift)
key once. Each press of the 2 key will now produce the following: 2, A, B, C. Each press of the 3 key will now produce
the following: 3, D, E, F. Press the RIGHT arrow key to cancel shift and move to the next character. See Appendix for
a summary of the SIA and Contact ID codes.
User Report Codes
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
UR001: Selb Prgr
[Name of User]
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
UR001:O=00 C=00r
[Name of User]
Description of Option
Each of the 99 User Codes and the Installer has communicator reporting codes for Open
(disarm) and Close (arm). Using the up/down arrow keys, select the appropriate user,
then press the right arrow key to begin programming of that user’s report codes.
The cursor starts at the 00 beside O (Open). Enter the desired two digit reporting code
and press the right arrow key to advance to the C (Close). Range is 00 to FF. Default is
00 (no report). To jump the cursor to the next report code without changing this one
simply press the right arrow key. The next press of the right arrow key will advance back
to the beginning screen.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
UR201:O=00 C=00r
Installer Op/Close
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
UR202:O=00 C=00r
Up/Dnload Op/Cl
The total number of available User Codes is dependent on the
Version of Firmware that is operating in the control.
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
UR203:O=00 C=00r
Quick Arm
The CID (Contact ID) or SIA Codes for User Reporting Codes are:
User RCs
Open
Close
CID
SIA
401
401
OP
CL
NOTE: On CID reporting the 3 digit code is preceded by a “1” for an opening
event or a “3” for a closing event.
Page 46
M1G Installation and Programming
Menu 14 - Wireless Definitions †
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
12345678901234567890123456789012123
Press RIGHT arrow key to select this menu. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to select
another menu. The ELK key backs up one menu level. To exit press the * or Exit key.
14-Wireless
Definitions
r
Elk manufacturers add-on “M1XRF” Wireless Receivers that can be used to add multiple wireless zones
(up to 144) to the M1. Please refer to the particular instructions that are packed with the Elk Receivers.
M1 is also compatible with the GE “Caddx” brand receiver model NX548E (48 zones) using the GE transmitters. Instructions
below detail how to use and program with the GE receiver, including notes for the discontinued GE models NX408E (8 zn),
NX416E (16 zn), and NX448E (48 zn) receivers. Only 1 Receiver may be connected to the control. A special 5 pin wiring
harness (ELK-WO35A) is required and it plugs into connector J3 “Aux Data Bus” located on the upper right side of the board.
Requires
ELK-W035A
Wiring Assembly
M1 PCB
R1
Compatible NX”E” receivers can
be identified by serial # that
begin with 231, 232, or 233.
Older “non-compatible” receivers
begin with 99, 100, & 101.
GE "Caddx" Receiver
NX-548E
and older Models
NX-408E
NX-416E
NX-448E
T1
RING
Connect
to J3
TIP
JP2
AUX
B
A
NEG
C
+
+12V
1 WAY
X-10
2 WAY
X-10
J4
Brown (n/a)
White (n/a)
RS232
J3
Red
Black
Green
+
A Data
SET ALL FOUR ADDRESS
SWITCHES TO OFF!
Wiring Diagram for GE “Caddx” NX Receiver to ELK Control
WirelessDefinitions
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1:Rec Selb Prgr
Receiver Options
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
RO1:=0 Rec Sizer
0=8 ZoneReceiver
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
RO2:=00 ZnBank r
StartingZone xxx
02=(Zone 17)
12=(Zone 97)
Description
Wireless Definitions menu is broken into four sections: 1:Receiver Options, 2:Xmitter
Options, 3:Xmitter Enroll, and 4:Keyfob Event Definitions. Used the Up or Down arrow
keys to pick the sections and then press the right arrow key to program.
Selects the size of the connected Receiver to reserve the appropriate number of zones.
For a NX408E (8 zones) enter a 0, NX416E (16 zones) enter a 1, NX448E 48 or NX548E
(48 zones) enter a 2.
Using the receiver size setting and this starting number, the M1 blocks out the required
number of zones. If a hardwired zone expander is encountered, resulting in a duplicate
zone, the M1 will error tone and return to a 00 setting. To resolve the conflict: move the
starting zone to another setting, move the conflicting zone expander to another address,
or reduce the receiver size setting. Valid starting zones must be increments of 16:
04=(Zone 33) 06=(Zone 49) 08=(Zone 65) 10=(Zone 81)
14=(Zone 113) 16=(Zone 129) 18=(Zone 145) 20=(Zone 161) 22=(Zone 177)
Example: Entering a value of 2 for receiver size and 02 for starting zone would block out
48 zones from 17 thru 64 as wireless. NOTE: If an 8 zone receiver is installed, the upper
8 zones are not available (wasted) as far as the control is concerned. The NX416E and
NX448E are therefore better economic choices.
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
RO3:=24 Hours r
Reg. Supervision
R03: Reg. Supervision sets the interval, in hours, for “check-in” by transmitters which are
programmed for “Supervision Type 1”, see transmitter option 01. Valid range is 001 to
255 hours, however a value lower than 4 is not recommended. Default value is 24.
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
R04: Fire Supervision sets the interval, in hours, for “check-in” by transmitters which are
programmed for “Supervision Type 2” (Fire), see transmitter option 02. Valid range is 001
to 255 hours, however a value lower than 4 is not recommended. Default value is 004.
RO4:=004 Hours r
Fire Supervision
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 47
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
2:Xmit Selb Prgr
Transmitter Optr
WZnxxx:Selr Prgr
Wireless Zone
Press the RIGHT arrow key to select 2:Xmit Transmitter Opt.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to locate a particular wireless transmitter. Press
the RIGHT arrow key to select and program the displayed transmitter.
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
This selection determines whether or not the transmitter is enabled. Whenever you
enroll a new transmitter this location will be automatically set to Yes. To permanently
or temporarily disable this transmitter program this to No.
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
This selection determines the “Supervision Type” for the transmitter. 0=No Supervision,
1=Regular Supervision, 3=Fire Supervision. See receiver selections R02 and R03 for
supervision time values. Default is 1.
WZnxxx 01:=No r
Enable Transmitr
WZnxxx02:=0
r
Supervision Type
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
WZnxxx 03:=No r
Enable Option 1
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
WZnxxx 04:=No r
Enable Option 2
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
WZnxxx 05:=001
Keyfob User ID
r
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
3:Learn Selb Prgr
WirelessTransmtr
WZone = xxx r
TransmtToEnroll
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
WZone = xxx Push
TransmiterButton
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
123456789012345678901234567890121234
4:KeyfobSelb Prgr
Event Definition
Keyfob Button=1r
1000=Event
This selection corresponds to the Caddx Transmitter Option 1 which deals with
enabling or disabling the internal reed switch on the individual Caddx transmitter so
that an external switch may be hardwired to the transmitter. Refer to the Caddx NX
Series Receiver Instructions, Option 1, for complete details.
This selection corresponds to the Caddx Transmitter Option 2 which deals with
whether an external switch should be normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C).
For N/O set option to No. For N/C set option to Yes. Refer to the Caddx NX Series
Receiver Instructions, Option 2, for complete details.
If the transmitter is a keyfob, this sets the User ID to be logged when the keyfob is
used to arm or disarm. Valid range is 001 to 255. Numbers 001 to 099 mirror the
keypad user codes. To report an open/close from a keyfob, program the corresponding
keypad user code to report. A report will be sent regardless of whether it was a user
code or a keyfob that armed/disarmed the system. NOTE: Since there are no open/
close report codes beyond user 99, any keyfob ID that is set higher that 99 will utilize
the opening/closing report code for User 99.
Press the RIGHT arrow key to select 3:Learn Wireless Transmitters.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to locate the wireless zone that you wish to enroll.
Then press the RIGHT arrow key to continue.
Go to the transmitter and press the tamper or enroll button. The keypad should emit a
short tone when the transmitter becomes enrolled.
Press the RIGHT arrow key to select 4:Keyfob Event Definition
Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to locate the keyfob button to program. There are
a total of 8 programmable buttons, however only 6 of the 8 may be used on the keyfob.
The valid activation events programmable for each button ranges from 0000-0030
(utilizing the Zone Definitions table) and 2001-2032 (utilizing Appendix A, Event Codes).
The standard buttons are as follows: Button 1 (Lock), 2 (Unlock), 3 (Light), and 4
(Asterisk). For Button 7 press a combination of buttons 1 & 2 together at the same
time. For Button 8 press a combination of buttons 3 & 4 together at the same time.
Button 3 on a keyfob can be changed to 5 by setting the transmitter Option 1 to Yes.
Button 4 on a keyfob can be changed to 6 by setting the transmitter Option 2 to Yes.
Page 48
M1G Installation and Programming
Section 4 - PC Programming and Automation Capabilities
4.1 ELK-RP Software
ELK-RP (RP) is a Windows based software package that is compatible with Windows 98
and later. It features an extremely intuitive user interface and contains all data in a central
database. RP can be run on a single PC or over a local area network (LAN) with multiple
operators. In addition to the traditional security programming features, RP allows you to
create and manage the automation functionality in the control. The following information is a brief overview including
illustrations of the various screens. Please refer to RP’s on-line help file for specific operation details.
4.1.1
RP Connection Methods
There are 3 methods for the RP software to connect with the control. Regardless of the method, the control’s serial number
and RP access code MUST match in order for the connection to be successful. The connection methods are:
1. Direct using Com_ (PC Com port) - Requires a 9 pin
serial cable from the PC’s RS-232 Com port to the
M1’s on-board 9 pin serial port. Data transfer is
115,200 baud. NOTE: If your computer only has a
USB port, an approved converter (USB to RS-232) is
available from ELK (ELK-USB232).
2. Dial-up using Modem and phone line - RP is
compatible with virtually all computer modems, even
56k modems. This is due to the M1’s built-in V.22 bis “True” modem, which handles data transfer at 2,400 baud. The 6
dial-up options are:
Fully Automatic - RP dials the control phone number and listens for the control to answer on it’s “rings until answer” setting.
If an answering machine answers, RP will transmit codes to override it automatically.
Prompt when answer - RP dials and listens for the control to answer. It waits for a manual OK before connecting.
Dial, hang up, dial again - This is faster than waiting on the control’s “rings until answer” setting. It is also useful for
reaching premises that have telephone company answer/forward services. The control must be enabled for this option.
After dialing, RP leaves the PC speaker on, and prompts you to click “Hang-up” after you hear two rings. It then forces a
time delay before allowing you to click OK to start the second dial. As long as the control properly detects the first two
rings and subsequent hang-up, it will wait up to 45 seconds for a second call and answer that call on the first ring.
Customer will force answer - Similar to method 1 except the User must enter keypad menu 8, option 5, item 1 to force the
control to answer. This is necessary if the “rings until answer” or “dial/hang-up/dial” options are not programmed.
Telephone connection already established - If a voice connection is already established using the control’s phone line and
the PC’s phone line, this method can be used to take over the connection and initiate an immediate connection.
Local connection via house telephone line - Convenient way to connect locally from virtually any house phone jack that is on
the same phone line as the one attached to the control. Connect the PC modem to the phone wall jack, click on Local
Connection, and RP will pick up the line and enter the access codes required to connect with the control.
3. Network - With an optional ELK-M1XEP Ethernet Port module you can connect over a Local or Wide Area Network. (Contact
ELK for details)
NOTE: UL requires that a Technician be On-Site when doing Remote Programming.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 49
4.1.2
Check for Conflicts
During the connect and disconnect process RP performs an automatic check of the data stored in the control and compares it
the database. If there are any conflicts (differences), a pop-up resolution window display them and allows corrections to be
made. ELK regards “Check for Conflicts” to be an especially important feature. It can point out any changes that have
occurred such as a user having added or changed a code. The resolution window allows you to receive the control’s data into
the database (accept the local version) or send the RP data to the control (accept the database version). NOTE: Checking for
conflicts adds considerable time to the connect/disconnect process, especially on dial-up connections. For this reason,
the automatic check for conflicts may be disabled from the SETUP menu. A manual Check for Conflicts can be selected
from the Send/Rcv icon.
4.1.3
Sending and Receiving Data
RP allows many options and groups of options to be sent or received individually, which greatly reduces the on-line connect
time if there are only a few items to be changed. However, a full send or receive occurs very quickly, thanks to the M1’s built-in
V.22 bis “True” Modem. RP features easy to use menus & toolbar icons and makes extensive use of the right mouse button
to perform operations. Try right clicking on any item or icon to see the available options.
4.2 Update/Verify Firmware in the Control and Peripherals
The control stores it’s operating firmware in “Flash” memory. This state-of-the-art memory allows electronic field updates to
the control and its peripherals, and eliminates the old fashion method of changing IC chips or shipping boards back to the
factory. As new firmware updates become available, they will be posted on ELK’s website [www.elkproducts.com] in a
password restricted “M1 Dealers ONLY” location. NOTE: Firmware updating can only be done from a Direct to PC Com port
connection or an optional Ethernet Network connection. Due to the amount of data that has to be transferred, Dial-up
connections cannot be used to perform firmware updates.
How to Update Firmware:
1. Connect a 9 pin serial cable from the Computer’s Serial Port to the 9 Pin RS232 Connector on the control.
2. Start RP and open the account belonging to that particular control. Click on the Connection menu icon and establish
a connection using the Direct using Com_ option.
3. Click on Update/Verify Firmware from the Send/Rcv menu icon.
4. On the Update/Verify screen, select the device to be updated (Control, Keypad, etc.) along with the “Update to new
firmware” option. Then click Continue.
5. The Update Firmware screen displays the device name, the current Firmware, Hardware, and Bootware version, and
a pull down window for selecting the firmware version to use on the update. Always select the latest firmware version
(highest number). Be sure to save all update (.bin) files that are downloaded or received via CDROM into the
~Program Files\ElkRP\Updates directory on your computer. This is where RP looks for all update files.
6. Click on the check box for “Update”. If “Reprogram” or “Rollback” is displayed the firmware file is the same as OR
older that what is in the control. Reprogramming with the same firmware is a waste of time but was included for
factory testing purposes. Rollback is not recommended except under the guidance of Elk Technical Support.
NOTE: The option for “Verify existing firmware” on the Update/Verify screen is normally not required except for
factory diagnostics. If the control has multiple keypads, expanders, etc., RP will display the details about each
one onscreen with a check box for selecting units for updating.
Page 50
M1G Installation and Programming
4.3 Automation Rules and Attributes
The RP Automation Programming software offers powerful, easy to setup and manage, life style enhancement features. The
automation programming allows mixing and matching of lighting components, outputs (relays or voltage), thermostats,
temperature sensors, and all the security inputs and features to integrate functions that add value and appeal to the owner/
user. Lights can be set to turn on and off in response to a time or day, a certain sensor, or according to the arm/disarm status
of the security control. Outputs can be set to control door strikes, irrigation sprinklers, circulating pumps valves, etc.
The power behind the automation features is the unique RULES Engine. Rules are expressions of what you would like to
happen at a given time or in response to a set of circumstances. The following information is intended to provide an overview
of the vast automation features in the control.
† TASKS - A Task is similar to a computer macro, in that a single activation can result in multiple actions or events. The
actions and triggering of a Task must be written or developed in a Whenever/And/Then Rule. The purpose of the task
screen is to assign each task its own 16 character description, 6 word voice phrase, and the ability to “Show” on the keypad or
the telephone remote control menu. Up to 32 Tasks can be programmed. Examples are “Water the Lawn” which could be
used to turn on a series of outputs or relays to control underground water valves for a certain time duration. “Welcome
Home” could be task used to control a series of lights at a given time or day or in response to someone disarming the
security system. The following shows several tasks and the voice description word listing.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 51
†
LIGHTING - The control can handle up to 256 Light (or appliance) devices. Each is assigned to one of 256 addresses.
Each device is displayed in a column format with the following options and settings: Name - Each device can be given a 16
character name (description) which is displayed on the keypad when the light is being controlled. Format - This pull down
box selects the protocol of the device. The available Lighting formats are: Standard, Extended, Preset dim, Compose, Serial
Port. The Serial port format is for UPB, ALC, Centralite, others through an ELK-M1XSP Lighting/Thermostat/Serial Expander
Interface. Type - This pull down box selects the whether the device is a: On/Off Switch, Dimmer, or Appliance. Show - If this
box is checked the device will appear “show” on the keypad and telephone remote as you scroll through the automation
control menus. 2-way - This checkbox is used to record whether the device is capable of replying back to commands. Voice
Description - Click on this box to pop up a window for programming a custom 6 word voice phrase. The voice is used
primarily during a telephone remote session. NOTE: Additional lighting formats are in development, including the new ZWave wireless devices. Even if a lighting product is not directly supported, it is always possible to use RS-232 ASCII
strings for communicating lighting control.
OUTPUTS - These can be in the form of voltage only, relays, or a combination of the two. Up to 208 outputs may be
controlled. The first 32 outputs have a 16 character description, 6 word voice phrase, and the “Show” on keypad or telephone
remote option. However, any output may be controlled from the keypad or telephone remote by entering its number. Outputs
can be used to actuate door locks, motors, fan, pumps, etc.
SUNRISE/SUNSET - Sunrise and sunset can be used to control lighting and other entities. This section is the setup for the
built-in Astronomical clock, which is capable of calculating sunrise and sunset times automatically. The inputs necessary to
setup the control for sunrise/sunset are latitude, longitude, and the time zone value where the control is installed. Latitude/
longitude information can often be found printed on city or state highway maps, or it can be researched on the internet. After
entering the required information, click calculate and then send to the control.
NOTE: The Time
Zone automatically
assumes “standard
time”. Therefore, the
calculated times will
reflect standard time.
If the control is set for
“Observe Daylight
Savings Time” the
sunrise/sunset times
will be adjusted by the
control accordingly.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 52
M1G Installation and Programming
† VOICE - This section is used to setup and customize many of the 6 word phrases that can be spoken by the control
during a certain event or when commanded by an automation rule. The capabilities of this section are quite powerful. The
library contains over 500+ words in addition to specialized speech commands for inserting conditions, current time, status/
state, time delays, and even an 800hz tone. In addition, any of the 10 custom recordable messages can be included when
building these 6 word phrases.
CUSTOM SETTINGS - These are 20 memory locations which may be assigned a 12 character description, a function type
(one of 3), and a starting value. An authorized user can then access the custom settings from keypad user menu 7Automation Custom Settings, and modify the value whether it be a numeric value, a timer (seconds), or a time-of-day.
Incorporating custom settings in rules provides the user the ability to modify how the rule will operate. For instance, the user
can modify the time or duration for the lawn sprinklers which have been programmed to turn on automatically. The function
types include: A 5 digit raw number with a range of 00000 to 65,535, a 5 digit timer (seconds) with a range of 00000 to 65,535
seconds, or a Time (time of day) which is formatted as 00:00 with a range of 00:00 to 23:59.
COUNTERS - These memory locations (often called flags) can be set, incremented, decremented, or compared by an
automation rule to track an event or keep up with how many times an event has occurred. There are a total of 64 counters.
Each can be programmed with a 12 character description, making it easy to reference in an automation rule.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 53
† THERMOSTATS - HVAC Thermostats may be read and/or controlled by the control and its automation rules engine. This
menu allows each thermostat to be assigned a 12 character description for easy reference in an automation rule. Currently
compatible thermostats include: RCS, Aprilaire, and HAI. Due to the various data protocols, a Lighting/Thermostat/Serial
Interface Expander (ELK-M1XSP) is needed to couple the data bus to HVAC thermostats. Depending on the brand of
thermostat, its wiring interface (RS-232 or RS-485), up to 16 HVAC thermostats can be controlled. Many communicating
thermostats operate stand-alone when they are not being remotely commanded by an automation controller.
TEXTS - This section allows custom text messages to be constructed and formatted. These messages can be transmitted
to an LCD keypad or out one of the RS232 serial ports to a PC or some other type of equipment. I.E. Touchscreen, Lighting
centers, etc. A message to the keypad could be “Happy Birthday” or “Please Pay Your Bill”, while a message going out a serial
port might be a series of ASCII characters formatted to a certain manufacturers protocol. Special options built into this menu
include: automatic display of temperature readings from Zone Temperature Sensors (ELK-M1ZTS) and from the temperature
sensor built into an LCD Keypad. The sending or receiving of text messages is controlled by the automation rules engine.
NOTE: Text messages share the same memory space as rules. The total number of text messages and rules is limited
by the M1 model that you are installing.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 54
M1G Installation and Programming
RULES - This section essentially brings all the power of the control’s automation and its features together. Rules consist of
three major elements: A WHENEVER (“triggering”) condition, one or more ANDs (“qualifiers”), and one or more THENs
(“activations”). Rules utilize the various elements of the previously described sections in addition to the many control
conditions (arm, disarm, alarms, etc.), plus many of the event codes listed in Appendix A. For example: A rule might be
triggered by a Task to activate a specific light and output, but only if the control is armed in a specific mode.
WHENEVER - The first element of a rule and the starting point of every rule is a triggering event. Every rule must have a
triggering event in order to be started. A triggering event can be a time of day occurrence, a zone opening or closing, the
security system going from armed to disarmed, a light changing from on to off, or literally hundreds of other events.
Below are some examples of WHENEVER elements:
Example 1 = WHENEVER THE TIME IS 08:00AM
Example 2 = WHENEVER Living Rm Light [6 (A6)] IS TURNED ON
An important point to remember is that a WHENEVER gets triggered by the transition of its event from one state to
another. In example 1, the trigger occurs when the time of day goes from 07:59AM to 08:00AM. In example 2, the trigger
occurs when the living room light goes from off to on. Some WHENEVER elements may even include the word
“BECOMES”, which clearly implies that the event has to change from its current condition and “become” the alternate
condition. Just remember, a rule can only be triggered by the transition of an event from one condition to another.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 55
AND - The second and optional element of a rule is a qualifier. Rules can have one or more qualifiers OR none at all. Even
though qualifiers are not required, they are ideal for filtering out actions that should not occur under certain
circumstances. A qualifier can be a time, day(s), the state of light or dark, the state of a zone, output, or light, and
hundreds of other variables. The state of light or dark can be determined by the Sunrise/Sunset settings from the M1’s
Astronomical Clock. Below are some examples of AND (qualifiers):
Example 3 = AND Front Door (Zn 1) IS NOT SECURE
Example 4 = AND THE DAY(S) OF THE WEEK IS/ARE -M-W-FExample 5 = AND IT IS DARK OUTSIDE
Example 6 = AND John’s House (Area 1) IS ARMED AWAY
THEN - The third and final element of a rule is the action that you wish to occur as a result of the Rule being triggered and
all the qualifiers being true. Below are some examples of THEN actions:
Example 7 = THEN TURN Air Cond (Out 9) OFF
Example 8 = THEN TURN Living Rm Light [6 A6)] OFF
Example 9 = THEN SET Main Floor (Tstat 1) OFF
Example 10 = THEN TURN All Lights On
Here is an example of a rule used to turn off the air condition anytime the front door is left open by the kids. It consists of a 30
second timer for the WHENEVER trigger an AND to test the door’s open/closed state, and a THEN to turn off the output that
controls the air condition.
WHENEVER EVERY 30 SECONDS
AND Front Door (Zn 1) IS NOT SECURE
THEN TURN Air Cond (Out 9) OFF
Page 56
M1G Installation and Programming
Examples of Rules - Shown below are a series of rules that should help illustrate the power and results that rules can
provide. Look closely at the ones that have multiple ANDs and THENs. Rules with Multiple ANDs and THENS work as
follows: When the WHENEVER element is triggered, each one of the AND elements is evaluated to determine if the condition
its testing is true. If any one of the ANDs are not true, the rule engine stops executing the rule immediately. However, if all
ANDs are true then the rule engine moves on to the THEN elements, executing each one of them.
Rule 1 is an energy saving example. It automatically turns off the Porch lights at 8:00AM everyday if it is light outside.
Rule 2 is a courtesy light example. It will turn on the Porch light for 5 minutes when the Front door opens (exiting the building)
provided it is dark outside and the control has been armed to the away mode.
Rule 3 is a comfort example. It periodically (every 20 seconds) checks the temperature reading of the Outdoor Temp sensor
and turns on the Porch Fan if the temperature becomes greater than 90 degrees. NOTE: An additional AND element
could be added to prevent the fan from operating on certain days or at certain times.
Rule 4 is another energy savings example. It adjusts the cooling setpoint of the Main Floor Thermostat to 85 degrees
whenever the control is armed to the away mode.
Rule 5 is especially great for a homeowner arriving home after dark. If they are equipped with an RF (wireless) Keyfob and
they press button #3, the rule will turn on the outside Flood lights and Porch lights for 5 minutes, provided it is dark
outside and the Flood lights are not already on. If the Floodlights were already on the rule would stop. This prevents
the lights from going off after 5 minutes if you intentionally had already turned them on manually.
Rule 6 shows how an ASCII string coming in from the serial port (port 0) could be used to unlock a door strike for 10 seconds
and announce “Access Allowed”. This string could come from Access Control system.
In this last example, three rules are used to chirp the outside
siren based on the input of a RF Keyfob to arm the control.
Rule 8 makes the siren chirp once if the control successfully
arms when the user presses button 1.
Rule 9 makes the siren chirp twice if the control disarms when
the user presses button 2
Rule 10 makes the siren chirp four times (error tone) if the
control fails to arm when the user presses button 1.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 57
Appendix A - Event Codes
Event Codes are four digit numbers used to represent alarms, troubles, arm/disarms, restores, and various other conditions that occur within the control. For the
most part, they are used only internally by the control’s software. For example: turning on the alarm output. However, there are cases where the installer may need
these codes. Case #1 - Keypad F key programming. Each of the Keypad F keys may be programmed to activate a particular condition such as Emergency Panic
Alarm. See Menu 04 - Keypad Definitions. The activation event code can be any of the zone definition codes. The F1 key may also be programmed to light up or
“illuminate” when a condition is active. The F1 key can illuminate when the Emergency Panic Alarm is active by programming the four digit event code 1009 =
Emergency Alarm. Case #2 - Event History log. Each of the 512 entries in the event history log is represented by one of these 4 digits event codes, along with the
time, date, area, and/or user code. It may be necessary or helpful to have these codes handy to fully interpret the log.
| - - - - - - - - These 34 events are Zone Definitions shown here for convenience. - - - - - - |
Event Description
0000 = No Event
Reset
N
0001 = Burg Entry/Exit 1
0002 = Burg Entry/Exit 2
0003 = Burg Perimeter Instant
0004 = Burglar Interior
0005 = Burg Interior Follower
0006 = Burglar Interior Nite
0007 = Burg Int Nite Delay
0008 = Burglar 24 hour
0009 = Burg 24hr Box Tamper
0010 = Fire 24 hour
0011 = Fire 24 hour Verified
0012 = Fire 24 hour Supervisory
0013 = Auxiliary1 24 hour
0014 = Auxiliary2 24 hour
0015 = Keyfob
0016 = Non Alarm
0017 = Carbon Monoxide 24 hour
0018 = Emergency 24 hour
0019 = Freeze Alarm 24 hour
0020 = Gas Alarm 24 hour
0021 = Heat Alarm 24 hour
0022 = Medical Alarm 24 hour
0023 = Police Alarm 24 hr w/indication
0024 = Police Alarm 24 hr no indication
0025 = Water Alarm 24 hour
0026 = Keyswitch Momentary
0027 = Keyswitch Mom’t - Away Mode
0028 = Keyswitch Mom’t - Stay Mode
0029 = Keyswitch Mom’t - Disarm Only
0030 = Keyswitch On/Off
0031 = Mute All Area Audibles
0032 = Power Supervisory 24 hour
0033 = Temperature 24 hour
0034 = Analog 24 hour
1000 =No Event
N
1001 = Fire Alarm
TMC
1002 = Fire Supervisory
TMC
1003 = Burglar Alarm, Any Area TMCB
1004 = Medical Alarm, Any Area TMC
1005 = Police Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1006 = Aux1 24 hr, Any Area
TMC
1007 = Aux2 24 hr, Any Area
TMC
1008 = CO Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1009 = Emergency Alm, Any Area TMC
1010 = Freeze Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1011 = Gas Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1012 = Heat Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1013 = Water Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1014 = Alarm, Any Area
TMC
1015 = Burglar Alarm in Area 1
1016 = Burglar Alarm in Area 2
1017 = Burglar Alarm in Area 3
1018 = Burglar Alarm in Area 4
1019 = Burglar Alarm in Area 5
1020 = Burglar Alarm in Area 6
1021 = Burglar Alarm in Area 7
1022 = Burglar Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1023 = Medical Alarm in Area 1
1024 = Medical Alarm in Area 2
1025 = Medical Alarm in Area 3
1026 = Medical Alarm in Area 4
1027 = Medical Alarm in Area 5
1028 = Medical Alarm in Area 6
1029 = Medical Alarm in Area 7
1030 = Medical Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
Page 58
Event Description
1031 = Police Alarm in Area 1
1032 = Police Alarm in Area 2
1033 = Police Alarm in Area 3
1034 = Police Alarm in Area 4
1035 = Police Alarm in Area 5
1036 = Police Alarm in Area 6
1037 = Police Alarm in Area 7
1038 = Police Alarm in Area 8
Reset
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
Event Description
1095 = Water Alarm in Area 1
1096 = Water Alarm in Area 2
1097 = Water Alarm in Area 3
1098 = Water Alarm in Area 4
1099 = Water Alarm in Area 5
1100 = Water Alarm in Area 6
1101 = Water Alarm in Area 7
1102 = Water Alarm in Area 8
Reset
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1039 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 1
1040 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 2
1041 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 3
1042 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 4
1043 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 5
1044 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 6
1045 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 7
1046 = Aux1 24 hr in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1103 = Any Alarm in Area 1
1104 = Any Alarm in Area 2
1105 = Any Alarm in Area 3
1106 = Any Alarm in Area 4
1107 = Any Alarm in Area 5
1108 = Any Alarm in Area 6
1109 = Any Alarm in Area 7
1110 = Any Alarm in Area 8
1047 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 1
1048 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 2
1049 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 3
1050 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 4
1051 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 5
1052 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 6
1053 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 7
1054 = Aux2 24 hr in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1055 = CO Alarm in Area 1
1056 = CO Alarm in Area 2
1057 = CO Alarm in Area 3
1058 = CO Alarm in Area 4
1059 = CO Alarm in Area 5
1060 = CO Alarm in Area 6
1061 = CO Alarm in Area 7
1062 = CO Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1111 = Any Keypad Code-Lockout
1112 = Keypad 01 Code-Lockout
1113 = Keypad 02 Code-Lockout
1114 = Keypad 03 Code-Lockout
1115 = Keypad 04 Code-Lockout
1116 = Keypad 05 Code-Lockout
1117 = Keypad 06 Code-Lockout
1118 = Keypad 07 Code-Lockout
1119 = Keypad 08 Code-Lockout
1120 = Keypad 09 Code-Lockout
1121 = Keypad 10 Code-Lockout
1122 = Keypad 11 Code-Lockout
1123 = Keypad 12 Code-Lockout
1124 = Keypad 13 Code-Lockout
1125 = Keypad 14 Code-Lockout
1126 = Keypad 15 Code-Lockout
1127 = Keypad 16 Code-Lockout
1063 = Emergency Alm in Area 1
1064 = Emergency Alm in Area 2
1065 = Emergency Alm in Area 3
1066 = Emergency Alm in Area 4
1067 = Emergency Alm in Area 5
1068 = Emergency Alm in Area 6
1069 = Emergency Alm in Area 7
1070 = Emergency Alm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1071 = Freeze Alarm in Area 1
1072 = Freeze Alarm in Area 2
1073 = Freeze Alarm in Area 3
1074 = Freeze Alarm in Area 4
1075 = Freeze Alarm in Area 5
1076 = Freeze Alarm in Area 6
1077 = Freeze Alarm in Area 7
1078 = Freeze Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1079 = Gas Alarm in Area 1
1080 = Gas Alarm in Area 2
1081 = Gas Alarm in Area 3
1082 = Gas Alarm in Area 4
1083 = Gas Alarm in Area 5
1084 = Gas Alarm in Area 6
1085 = Gas Alarm in Area 7
1086 = Gas Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1087 = Heat Alarm in Area 1
1088 = Heat Alarm in Area 2
1089 = Heat Alarm in Area 3
1090 = Heat Alarm in Area 4
1091 = Heat Alarm in Area 5
1092 = Heat Alarm in Area 6
1093 = Heat Alarm in Area 7
1094 = Heat Alarm in Area 8
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1128 = Fire Trouble, Any Zone
TMC
1129 = Burglar Trouble, Any Zone TMC
1130 = Fail to Communicate Tbl
N
1131 = RF Sensor Low Battery Tbl
N
1132 = RF Jamming Trouble
N
1133 = Lost Keypad Trouble
N
1134 = Lost Input Expander Tbl
N
1135 = Lost Output Expander Tbl
N
1136 = EEprom Memory Error Tbl
C
1137 = Flash Memory Error Trouble C
1138 = AC Failure Trouble
N
1139 = Control Low Battery Trouble N
1140 = Control Over Current Trouble N
1141 = Expansion Module Trouble
N
1142 = Output 2 Supervisory Tbl
N
1143 = Telephone Line Fault Tbl
1144 = Restore Fire Zone
1145 = Restore Fire Supv Zone
1146 = Restore Burglar Zone
1147 = Restore Medical Zone
1148 = Restore Police Zone
1149 = Restore Aux1 24 hr Zone
1150 = Restore Aux2 24 hr Zone
1151 = Restore CO Zone
1152 = Restore Emergency Zone
1153 = Restore Freezer Zone
1154 = Restore Gas Zone
1155 = Restore Heat Zone
1156 = Restore Water Zone
1157 = Communication Fail Restore
1158 = AC Fail Restore
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Event Description
Reset
1159 = Low Battery Restore
B
1160 = Control Over Current Restore B
1161 = Expansion Module Restore
B
1162 = Output 2 Restore
B
1163 = Telephone Line Restore
B
1164 = Alarm Memory
1165 = Alarm Memory in Area 1
1166 = Alarm Memory in Area 2
1167 = Alarm Memory in Area 3
1168 = Alarm Memory in Area 4
1169 = Alarm Memory in Area 5
1170 = Alarm Memory in Area 6
1171 = Alarm Memory in Area 7
1172 = Alarm Memory in Area 8
A
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
TMC
1173 = Area Armed
1174 = Area Disarmed
1175 = Area 1 Arm State
1176 = Area 2 Arm State
1177 = Area 3 Arm State
1178 = Area 4 Arm State
1179 = Area 5 Arm State
1180 = Area 6 Arm State
1181 = Area 7 Arm State
1182 = Area 8 Arm State
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
is Armed Away
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
= Area
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
is Armed
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Stay
Stay
Stay
Stay
Stay
Stay
Stay
Stay
1199 = Area 1 is Armed Stay Instant
1200 = Area 2 is Armed Stay Instant
1201 = Area 3 is Armed Stay Instant
1202 = Area 4 is Armed Stay Instant
1203 = Area 5 is Armed Stay Instant
1204 = Area 6 is Armed Stay Instant
1205 = Area 7 is Armed Stay Instant
1206 = Area 8 is Armed Stay Instant
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1207 = Area 1 is Armed Night
1208 = Area 2 is Armed Night
1209 = Area 3 is Armed Night
1210 = Area 4 is Armed Night
1211 = Area 5 is Armed Night
1212 = Area 6 is Armed Night
1213 = Area 7 is Armed Night
1214 = Area 8 is Armed Night
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
Armed
Armed
Armed
Armed
Armed
Armed
Armed
Armed
Night
Night
Night
Night
Night
Night
Night
Night
Instant
Instant
Instant
Instant
Instant
Instant
Instant
Instant
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix A - Event Codes (cont.)
Event
Description
Reset
1223 = Area 1 is Armed Vacation
1224 = Area 2 is Armed Vacation
1225 = Area 3 is Armed Vacation
1226 = Area 4 is Armed Vacation
1227 = Area 5 is Armed Vacation
1228 = Area 6 is Armed Vacation
1229 = Area 7 is Armed Vacation
1230 = Area 8 is Armed Vacation
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1231 = Area 1 is Force Armed
1232 = Area 2 is Force Armed
1233 = Area 3 is Force Armed
1234 = Area 4 is Force Armed
1235 = Area 5 is Force Armed
1236 = Area 6 is Force Armed
1237 = Area 7 is Force Armed
1238 = Area 8 is Force Armed
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1239 = Zone Bypassed
1240 = All Zones Unbypassed
1241 = Burglar Zone Fault
N
B
N
1242 = Burglar Status
1243 = Area 1 Burglar Status
1244 = Area 2 Burglar Status
1245 = Area 3 Burglar Status
1246 = Area 4 Burglar Status
1247 = Area 5 Burglar Status
1248 = Area 6 Burglar Status
1249 = Area 7 Burglar Status
1250 = Area 8 Burglar Status
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1251 = Area 1 Chime Mode
1252 = Area 2 Chime Mode
1253 = Area 3 Chime Mode
1254 = Area 4 Chime Mode
1255 = Area 5 Chime Mode
1256 = Area 6 Chime Mode
1257 = Area 7 Chime Mode
1258 = Area 8 Chime Mode
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1259 = Area 1 Chime Alert
1260 = Area 2 Chime Alert
1261 = Area 3 Chime Alert
1262 = Area 4 Chime Alert
1263 = Area 5 Chime Alert
1264 = Area 6 Chime Alert
1265 = Area 7 Chime Alert
1266 = Area 8 Chime Alert
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
= Entry Delay Active
= Area 1 Entry Delay
= Area 2 Entry Delay
= Area 3 Entry Delay
= Area 4 Entry Delay
= Area 5 Entry Delay
= Area 6 Entry Delay
= Area 7 Entry Delay
= Area 8 Entry Delay
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
= Exit Delay Active
= Area 1 Exit Delay
= Area 2 Exit Delay
= Area 3 Exit Delay
= Area 4 Exit Delay
= Area 5 Exit Delay
= Area 6 Exit Delay
= Area 7 Exit Delay
= Area 8 Exit Delay
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
-
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Expires
Expires
Expires
Expires
Expires
Expires
Expires
Expires
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Event
Description
Reset
1293 = Automatic Closing
1294 = Early Closing
1295 = Closing Time Extended
1296 = Fail to Close
1297 = Late to Close
1298 = Keyswitch Closing
1299 = Duress
1300 = Exception Opening
1301 = Early Opening
1302 = Fail to Open
1303 = Late to Open
1304 = Keyswitch Opening
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1305 = Area 1 Closing Ring Back
1306 = Area 2 Closing Ring Back
1307 = Area 3 Closing Ring Back
1308 = Area 4 Closing Ring Back
1309 = Area 5 Closing Ring Back
1310 = Area 6 Closing Ring Back
1311 = Area 7 Closing Ring Back
1312 = Area 8 Closing Ring Back
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
= Access Keypad 1
= Access Keypad 2
= Access Keypad 3
= Access Keypad 4
= Access Keypad 5
= Access Keypad 6
= Access Keypad 7
= Access Keypad 8
= Access Keypad 9
= Access Keypad 10
= Access Keypad 11
= Access Keypad 12
= Access Keypad 13
= Access Keypad 14
= Access Keypad 15
= Access Keypad 16
= Access, Any Keypad
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
1330 = Keypad Beep Area 1
1331 = Keypad Beep Area 2
1332 = Keypad Beep Area 3
1333 = Keypad Beep Area 4
1334 = Keypad Beep Area 5
1335 = Keypad Beep Area 6
1336 = Keypad Beep Area 7
1337 = Keypad Beep Area 8
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1338 = Area 1 Exit Error
1339 = Area 2 Exit Error
1340 = Area 3 Exit Error
1341 = Area 4 Exit Error
1342 = Area 5 Exit Error
1343 = Area 6 Exit Error
1344 = Area 7 Exit Error
1345 = Area 8 Exit Error
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1346 = Audio Amplifier Status
TMC
1347 = Control Power Status
N
1348 = Light
N
1349 = Dark
N
1350 = Security (Day) Alert
TMC
1351 = Dialer Abort
B
1352 = Dialer Cancel
B
1353 = Dialer Auto Test
B
1354 = Local Programming Begin
N
1355 = Local Programming End
B
1356 = Keyswitch Security Alert TMC
1357 = Event Log is 80% Full
N
1358 = Telephone Line Is Ringing
B
1359 = Telephone Line Seized Status T
1360 = Telephone Line Hook Status T
1361 = Telephone Local Access
T
1362 = Telephone Remote Access
T
M1G Installation and Programming
Event
Description
Reset
1363 = Remote Programming Start
1364 = Remote Programming Stop
1365 = AC Fail Tbl - Power Supv Zn
1366 = Low Batt Tbl - Pwr Supv Zn
1367 = System Start Up
1368 = Control Low Volt Shutdown
1369 = RF Keyfob Button 1
1370 = RF Keyfob Button 2
1371 = RF Keyfob Button 3
1372 = RF Keyfob Button 4
1373 = RF Keyfob Button 5
1374 = RF Keyfob Button 6
1375 = RF Keyfob Button 7
1376 = RF Keyfob Button 8
1377 = Lost Serial Port Exp Tbl
1378 = Rule Triggered Voice Dial
1379 = Dialer Report Cleared
1380 = Central Station Kissoff
1381 = Transmitter Supervision Loss
1382 = Smoke Detector Clean Me
1383 = Ethernet Trouble
1384 = Ethernet Restore
1385 = AC Restore - Pwr Supv Zn
1386 = Low Batt Rest - Pwr Sup Zn
N
B
N
N
B
N
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
N
B
B
B
N
Event
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
Description
Reset
= F4 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
= F5 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
= F6 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
= Any KP Key Is Pressed
to 4000 = No Event
B
B
B
F
4001 to 4208 = Zone State 1 to 208
4209 to 5000 = No Event
T
5001 to 5208 = Bypass State 1 to 208 T
5209 to 6000 = No Event
6001 to 6208 = Alm Memory 1 to 208 T
6209 to 7000 = No Event
7001 to 7208 = Output State 1 to 208 N
7209 to 8000 = No Event
8001 thru 9999 = No Event
1387 to 2000 = No Event/Not Used
2001 = Automation Control 1
~
2032 = Automation Control 32
TF
TF
2033 to 3000 = No Event/Not Used
N
3001 = F1 Key on Keypad 1
3002 = F2 Key on Keypad 1
3003 = F3 Key on Keypad 1
3004 = F4 Key on Keypad 1
3005 = F5 Key on Keypad 1
3006 = F6 Key on Keypad 1
3007 to 3012 = F1 to F6 on KP 2
3013 to 3018 = F1 to F6 on KP 3
3019 to 3024 = F1 to F6 on KP 4
3025 to 3030 = F1 to F6 on KP 5
3031 to 3036 = F1 to F6 on KP 6
3037 to 3042 = F1 to F6 on KP 7
3043 to 3048 = F1 to F6 on KP 8
3049 to 3054 = F1 to F6 on KP 9
3055 to 3060 = F1 to F6 on KP 10
3061 to 3066 = F1 to F6 on KP 11
3067 to 3072 = F1 to F6 on KP 12
3073 to 3078 = F1 to F6 on KP 13
3079 to 3084 = F1 to F6 on KP 14
3085 to 3090 = F1 to F6 on KP 15
3091 to 3096 = F1 to F6 on KP 16
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
3097 = F1 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
3098 = F2 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
3099 = F3 Key, Any KP Is Pressed
B
B
B
“Reset” Attribute
The letter(s) displayed in Reset column indicate what condition(s) it takes to
clear an event once it has been activated.
For example: the letters TMC indicate the event will reset when the output
timer ends, or when manually turned off, or when a valid user code is
entered, whichever comes first.
NOTE:
The reset attributes are shown only for informational purposes. They are set
by the factory and cannot be altered.
N
T
M
C
A
D
B
F
(0)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(16)
(32)
(64)
(128)
Event
Event
Event
Event
Event
Event
Event
Event
follows the activation
clears when output timer ends
clears when manually turned off
clears upon User Code entry
clears upon Arming
clears upon Disarming
clears almost immediately “Blip”
toggles with each activation
Page 59
Appendix B - Telephone Remote Control
†
There are two methods of entry:
Operation from an Inside Telephone:
1. Lift the telephone and listen for dial tone.
2. Press * * * to alert the control. (To hear over the inside speakers press * 0 * instead.)
The control will pick, disconnect the phone line and dial tone, and announce: “Please enter security code”.
3. Enter a valid user code. If code is correct the control should announce: “Access Authorized”.
4. Enter a menu selection OR press 0 to hear the entire menu.
Operating from an Outside Telephone:
1. Dial-in to the phone number attached to the control.
After a programmed number of rings the control should answer with four short beeps. If an answering machine
picks up, wait for the message to quit and proceed as follows:
2. Press * * * to alert the control. The control will announce: “Please enter security code”.
3. Enter a valid user code. If code is correct the control should pickup announce: “Access Authorized”.
4. Enter a menu selection OR press 0 to hear the entire menu.
Menu Selections: Main menu options are underlined.
For Help - press 0. A voice message will explain the function of each key.
For Arm Status - press 1. A voice message will identify whether the system is currently armed or disarmed and will allow the
state to be changed. There are two options:
If Disarmed - Press 1 for list of Arming options. There are 6 options:
Press 1 for Away mode.
Press 2 for Stay mode.
Press 3 for Stay Instant mode.
Press 4 for Armed Night mode.
Press 5 for Armed Night Instant mode.
Press 6 for Vacation mode.
If Armed – Press 2 to disarm.
For Automation Control - press 2. A voice message will prompting you to select one of the following automation options:
For Automation Task - press 1. Tasks are like computer macros. They can be programmed and named using the RP
software and are used to perform a chain or series of events upon activation. Upon entry into this menu, any task which
was designated to “Show” will be announced by name and by number. To choose a task, enter its number. For fastest
operation, add a 0 in front of single digit numbers. I.E. for a 3 enter 03. NOTE: Any valid task can be selected by entering
it’s two digit number, even if it was not announced. The task name will then be repeated along with the prompt: To
Activate - press #. This should cause the events to activate.
For Light Control - press 2. This menu allows direct control any light device and can even be used for PLC appliance
modules. Lights are programmed and named using RP software. Upon entry into this menu, any light which was
designated to “Show” will be announced by name and number. To choose a light, enter it’s three digit number. For
fastest operation, add 0’s in front of numbers less than three digits. NOTE: Any valid light can be selected by entering it’s
three digit number, even if it was not announced. The light name will then be repeated along with it’s current status (On/
Off) and the prompt: To Change - press #. The light should change state.
For Output Control - press 3. This menu allows direct control any valid output on the control. Outputs are programmed
and named using RP software. Upon entry into this menu, any output which was designated to “Show” will be
announced by name and number. To choose an output, enter it’s three digit number. For fastest operation, add 0’s in
front of numbers less than three digits. NOTE: Any valid output can be selected by entering it’s three digit number, even if
it was not announced. The output name will then be repeated along with it’s current status (On/Off) and the prompt: To
Change - press #. The output should change state.
For Sensor Temperature - press 4. Temperature sensors can be connected to the first 16 zones on the control. This
menu allows you to hear the current temperature of any valid sensor. Upon entry into this menu, any sensor programmed
designated to “Show” by the RP software will be announced by number. To choose a sensor, enter it’s two digit number.
Add 0’s in front of numbers single digits. NOTE: Any valid sensor can be selected by entering it’s two digit number, even
if it was not announced. The sensor number will then be repeated along with it’s current reading.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 60
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix B - Telephone Remote Control (cont.)
Automation Menu continued
For Keypad Temperature - press 5. Certain models of keypads have a built-in temperature sensor. This menu allows
you to hear the current temperature of any valid keypad sensor. Upon entry into this menu, any keypad sensor designated
to “Show” by the RP software will be announced by number. To choose a keypad sensor, enter it’s two digit number. Add
0’s in front of numbers single digits. NOTE: Any valid keypad sensor can be selected by entering it’s two digit number,
even if it was not announced. The keypad sensor number will then be repeated along with it’s current reading.
For Thermostat Temperature - press 6. Specific brands of HVAC thermostats can be connected to the control. This
menu allows you to hear the current temperature of any valid thermostat. Upon entry into this menu, any thermostat
designated to “Show” by the RP software will be announced by number. To choose a thermostat, enter it’s two digit
number. Add 0’s in front of numbers single digits. NOTE: Any valid thermostat can be selected by entering it’s two digit
number, even if it was not announced. The thermostat number will then be repeated along with it’s current reading.
For Trouble Status press 3. Upon entry into this menu, any current system troubles will be announced by name. This will
deliver a voice message stating that system is normal or the first system trouble that is present. Options: Each time 3 is
pressed the next system trouble is identified.
For Zone Status press 4. Upon entry into this menu, any current zone troubles will be announced by name. This will deliver a
voice message stating either that “no zones violated” or “zone xx violated”. Additional presses of the 4 key will announce
additional troubled zones, if any exist.
For Audio Monitor press 7. This only works if a 2 way listen-in interface is installed. (ELK-M1TWI) It will open an audio path
from the phone to the listen-in board and the output 1 speakers. For full operating instructions see Appendix D.
To exit and hang-up press 9. This will deliver the good-bye voice message. The telephone remote control operation has
ending.
To hear menu options press 0. This will deliver a voice message explaining the function of each key.
* NOTE: If no response or key presses are heard by the control, the item or menu will be repeated once again. If no key
presses are received within a 30 second time frame the message “Hanging Up, Good-bye” will be heard and the control will
then disconnect.
WHAT HAPPENS IF THE PHONE LINE IS BUSY?
If the dialer is in use (such as during an alarm message report) then no dial tone will be heard and the offhook sequence will
be ignored. The best thing to do at that point is to try again later (when the dialer is free) or hold onto the phone
and wait till dialer hangs up. When the phone line is released (idle) dial tone will again be heard and you can then enter the
offhook sequence.
WHAT HAPPENS IF AN ALARM OCCURS?
If the control is programmed to communicate alarms to a central monitoring station, it will automatically pick up the phone line
and disconnect all calls when an alarm occurs. During this time period the telephone remote control will be inoperable.
However, the installer may elect to program a communicator delay before dial time which would permit the telephone remote
to function for a short time period immediately after an alarm. During this time it would be possible to enter the offhook
sequence of * * * and enter all the proper codes to disarm and/silence the alarm.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 61
Appendix C - Voice Message Vocabulary
Word or Phrase
{Blank} = 0
Zero = 21
One = 22
Two = 23
Three = 24
Four = 25
Five = 26
Six = 27
Seven = 28
Eight = 29
Nine = 30
Ten = 31
Eleven = 32
Twelve = 33
Thirteen = 34
Fourteen = 35
Fifteen = 36
Sixteen = 37
Seventeen = 38
Eighteen = 39
Nineteen = 40
Twenty = 41
Thirty = 42
Forty = 43
Fifty = 44
Sixty = 45
Seventy = 46
Eighty = 47
Ninety = 48
Hundred = 49
Thousand = 50
[200ms Silence] = 51
[500ms Silence] = 52
[800hz Tone] = 53
A
A = 54
Access = 55
Acknowledged = 56
AC power = 57
Activate = 58
Activated = 59
Active = 60
Adjust = 61
Air = 62
Alarm = 63
Alert = 64
All = 65
AM = 66
An = 67
And = 68
Answer = 69
Any = 70
Are = 71
Area = 72
Arm = 73
Armed = 74
At = 75
Attic = 76
Audio = 77
Auto = 78
Authorized = 79
Automatic = 80
Automation = 81
Auxiliary = 82
Away = 83
Page 62
Word or Phrase
B
B = 84
Back = 85
Barn = 86
Basement = 87
Bathroom = 88
Battery = 89
Bedroom = 90
Been = 91
Bell = 92
Bottom = 93
Break = 94
Breakfast = 95
Bright = 96
Building = 97
Burglar = 98
Button = 99
By = 100
Bypassed = 101
C
Cabinet = 102
Call = 103
Camera = 104
Cancel = 105
Carbon monoxide = 106
Card = 107
Center = 108
Central = 109
Change = 110
Check = 111
Chime = 112
Circuit = 113
Clear = 114
Closed = 115
Closet = 116
Code = 117
Cold = 118
Condition = 119
Connect = 120
Control = 121
Cool = 122
Cooling = 123
Corner = 124
Crawlspace = 125
D
Danger = 126
Day = 127
Deck = 128
Decrease = 129
Defective = 130
Degrees = 131
Delay = 132
Den = 133
Denied = 134
Detected = 135
Detector = 136
Device = 137
Dial = 138
Dialing = 139
Dim = 140
Dining room = 141
Disable = 142
Disarm = 143
Disarmed = 144
Dock = 145
Door = 146
*RP only *
Word or Phrase
Word or Phrase
Doors = 147
Down = 148
Driveway = 149
Has Expired = 207
Have = 208
Hear menu options = 209
Heat = 210
Help = 211
High = 212
Hold = 213
Home = 214
Hot = 215
Hot tub = 216
House = 217
Humidity = 218
HVAC = 219
E
East = 150
Emergency = 151
Enable = 152
End = 153
Energy = 154
Enrollment = 155
Enter = 156
Entering = 157
Entertainment = 158
Enter the = 159
Entry = 160
Environment = 161
Equipment = 162
Error = 163
Evacuate = 164
Event = 165
Exercise = 166
Expander = 167
Exit = 168
Exterior = 169
F
F = 170
Fail = 171
Failure = 172
Family room = 173
Fan = 174
Feed = 175
Fence = 176
Fire = 177
First = 178
Flood = 179
Floor = 180
Followed = 181
Force = 182
Fountain = 183
Foyer = 184
Freeze = 185
Front = 186
Full = 187
Furnace = 188
Fuse = 189
G
Game = 190
Garage = 191
Gas = 192
Gate = 193
Glass = 194
Go = 195
Good = 196
Good-bye = 197
Great = 198
Group = 199
Guest = 200
Gun = 201
H
Hall = 202
Hallway = 203
Hanging up = 204
Hang up = 205
Has = 206
I
If = 220
Immediately = 221
In = 222
Inches = 223
Increase = 224
Inner = 225
Input = 226
Inside = 227
Instant = 228
Interior = 229
In The = 230
Intruder = 231
Intrusion = 232
Invalid = 233
Is = 234
Is about to expire = 235
Is active = 236
Is armed = 237
Is canceled = 238
Is closed = 239
Is disarmed = 240
Is low = 241
Is off = 242
Is OK = 243
Is on = 244
Is open = 245
J
Jacuzzi = 246
Jewelry = 247
K
Keep = 248
Key = 249
Keypad = 250
Kitchen = 251
L
Lamp = 252
Laundry = 253
Lawn = 254
Leak = 255
Leave = 256
Left = 257
Less = 258
Level = 259
Library = 260
Light = 261
Lights = 262
Line = 263
Living room = 264
Loading = 265
Lobby = 266
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix C - Voice Message Vocabulary
(cont.)
Word or Phrase
Word or Phrase
Word or Phrase
Word or Phrase
Location = 267
Lock = 268
Low = 269
Lower = 270
Patio = 327
Pause = 328
Perimeter = 329
Personal = 330
Phone = 331
Place = 332
Play = 333
Please = 334
Plus = 335
PM = 336
Police = 337
Pool = 338
Porch = 339
Port = 340
Pound = 341
Pounds = 342
Power = 343
Press = 344
Pressure = 345
Problem = 346
Program = 347
Protected = 348
Pump = 349
Silence = 391
Siren = 392
Sliding = 393
Smoke = 394
Someone = 395
South = 396
Spare = 397
Speaker = 398
Sprinkler = 399
Stairs = 400
Stairway = 401
Star = 402
Start = 403
Status = 404
Stay = 405
Stock = 406
Stop = 407
Storage = 408
Storm = 409
Studio = 410
Study = 411
Sump = 412
Sun = 413
Switch = 414
System = 415
W
Wake up = 451
Walk = 452
Wall = 453
Warehouse = 454
Warning = 455
Water = 456
Way = 457
Welcome = 458
West = 459
What = 460
When = 461
Where = 462
Will = 463
Window = 464
Windows = 465
With = 466
Work = 467
M
M = 271
Machine = 272
Mail = 273
Main = 274
Mains = 275
Manual = 276
Master = 277
Max = 278
Media = 279
Medical = 280
Medicine = 281
Memory = 282
Menu = 283
Message = 284
Middle = 285
Minute = 286
Missing = 287
Mode = 288
Module = 289
Monitor = 290
More = 291
Motion = 292
Motor = 293
N
Next = 294
Night = 295
No = 296
Normal = 297
North = 298
Not = 299
Notified = 300
Now = 301
Number = 302
Nursery = 303
O
Of = 304
Off = 305
Office = 306
Oh = 307
OK = 308
On = 309
On-line = 310
Only = 311
Open = 312
Operating = 313
Option = 314
Or = 315
Other = 316
Out = 317
Outlet = 318
Output = 319
Outside = 320
Over = 321
Overhead = 322
P
Panel = 323
Panic = 324
Parking = 325
Partition = 326
R
Radio = 350
Raise = 351
Ready = 352
Rear = 353
Receiver = 354
Record = 355
Recreation = 356
Relay = 357
Remain calm = 358
Remote = 359
Repeat = 360
Report = 361
Reporting = 362
Reset = 363
Restored = 364
Return = 365
Right = 366
Roof = 367
Room = 368
Running = 369
S
Safe = 370
Save = 371
Screen = 372
Second = 373
Secure = 374
Security = 375
Select = 376
Sensor = 377
Serial = 378
Service = 379
Set = 380
Setback = 381
Set point = 382
Setting = 383
Shed = 384
Shipping = 385
Shock = 386
Shop = 387
Shorted = 388
Shunted = 389
Side = 390
M1G Installation and Programming
T
Tamper = 416
Tank = 417
Task = 418
Telephone = 419
Television = 420
Temperature = 421
Test = 422
Thank you = 423
That = 424
The = 425
Theater = 426
Thermostat = 427
Third = 428
Time = 429
Toggle = 430
Top = 431
Transformer = 432
Transmitter = 433
Trespassing = 434
Trouble = 435
Turn = 436
Twice = 437
Type = 438
U
Under = 439
Unit = 440
Unlocked = 441
Unoccupied = 442
Up = 443
User = 444
Utility = 445
V
Vacation = 446
Valve = 447
Video = 448
Violated = 449
Visitor = 450
Y
Yard = 468
Year = 469
You = 470
Z
Zone = 471
Zones = 472
-------------------------Items below are special words
and phrases which may be
used to resolve unusual
situation. For example: Custom
1 thru 10 are 6 second locations
that you may custom record.
The items shown in [ ] can be
used to speak (say) the time, or
condition based on the system
or zone status.
‘Custom1’ = 1
‘Custom2’ = 2
‘Custom3’ = 3
‘Custom4’ = 4
‘Custom5’ = 5
‘Custom6’ = 6
‘Custom7’ = 7
‘Custom8’ = 8
‘Custom9’ = 9
‘Custom10’ = 10
[Insert Condition] = 2
[Insert Time] = 3
[Intruder Message] = 473
[Inverted Condition] = 4
[Say Closed/Open] = 509
[Say Down/Up] = 507
[Say Locked/Unlocked] = 496
[Say Not Secure/Secure] = 505
[Say Number]
[Say Off/On] = 511
[Say On/Off] = 512
[Say Open/Closed] = 510
[Say Secure/Not Secure] = 506
[Say Unlocked/Locked] = 495
[Say Up/Down] = 508
Page 63
Appendix D - Two Way “Listen-in/Talk” Interface †
Using a Two Way Interface board (ELK-M1TWI), the control can accommodate up to 3 zones of listen-in. Each zone can have up
to 4 microphones for a total of 12 listen-in points. Talk back is delivered through the speakers connected to Output 1. A two way
session can be triggered by any number of zones when an alarm occurs. Two way can also be triggered during a Telephone
Remote Control session. Instructions for the ELK-M1TWI are included with the interface.
OPERATION
1. Two way Listen-in must first be enabled from Menu 07-Global System Options. There are two required options. Option 31,
“2Way Listen-in Enable” (No or Yes) and Option 32, “2Way Callback Time” (000 to 255 seconds). These options are defaulted
to No and 000. In addition, you must also decide which zone(s) need to activate listen-in and set their “Enable Listen-in”
programming option. Whenever a Central Station alarm message is transmitted for one of these zones, the dialer provides two
methods for initiating a listen-in session.
1a. Hold the Line - After alarm kissoff the dialer will hold the phone line open for the amount of time programmed in Option 32,
“2Way Callback Time”. This can be from 001 to 255 seconds. During this time the Operator may pick up the line and press * 55
* to initiate an immediate two way session. If the control does not receive * 55 * during the time period it will hang up and
release the phone line.
1b. Callback - Upon hangup the control uses the same time value (Option 32, “2Way Callback Time”) to begin a callback time
window. During this time window the control will answer any incoming call on the 1st ring, and allow the Operator to press * 55
* to initiate a two way session.
2. Two way may also be initiated by calling in using the Telephone Remote Control, and pressing 7 - “Audio Monitor”.
3. Once a two way session has begun, it will continue for 3 minutes before automatically disconnecting. To extend the two way
session for 3 additional minutes you must press command 7.
TONE COMMANDS
* 55 *
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-8
9-9
0
*
#
BEGIN LISTEN-IN Used by Operator to begin a listen-in session.
TALK
Talk through all speakers connected to Output 1.
LISTEN All 3 microphone zones are enabled initially. Use key 4 to change mics.
SENSITIVITY INCREASE Raise the microphone gain.
MICROPHONE SELECT 4+0 Selects ALL microphones, 4+1 Mic1 zone, 4+2 Mic2 zone, 4+3 Mic3 zone
[future use]
SENSITIVITY DECREASE Lowers the microphone gain.
EXTEND TIME for 3 minutes
TERMINATE SESSION and enable 1 ring callback answer for selected time.
TERMINATE SESSION without enabling callback answer mode.
[future use]
CANCEL last key-press (undo )
[future use]
The Two-Way talk-back volume from Output 1 can be adjusted from level of 0 - 7 using ONLY the ElkRP Remote Programming
Software; (Globals G29-G42 Special Tab).
Dialer Activated (Alarm) Dialer remains off-hook for time set
in Menu-07, Option 32, "2 Way
Callback Time" looking for command
* 55 * to start a two-way session.
Dialer seizes house
phone line, dials
Central Station and
sends report, then
receives Kissoff.
Yes
Command
*55* received?
Two way listen-in starts. It ends after 3
minutes or when command 99 is pressed.
End
No
Dialer hangs up. Phone line is un-seized.
Was
the alarm from
a listen-in
Zone?
Yes
No
Dialer hangs up. Phone
line is un-seized.
Phone line is seized again after 5
seconds. "2 Way Callback Time"
restarts, during which time the
dialer will answer any incoming
call on the 1st ring.
Phone rings Yes
Dialer
before timer
Answers
expires?
No
Command Yes
* 55 *
received?
No
"CS Verify Call Time" starts, if set. (Menu-07, Option 33) Dialer will not dial additional alarm
reports during this time, keeping phone line free for Central Station "Voice" Verification.
Two way
listen-in
starts.
It ends after
3 minutes or
when
command
99 is
pressed.
End
END
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 64
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix E - SIA CP-01 Compliance †
This control has been self-verified to be compliant with the SIA CP-01 Control Panel Standard - Features for False Alarm Reduction
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES, SHIPPING DEFAULTS, AND RECOMMENDED PROGRAMMING
FEATURE
CP-01 Std.
Par. #
REQUIREMENT
ALLOWABLE RANGE / PURPOSE
RECOMMENDED
PROGRAMMING *
SHIPPING
DEFAULT
Exit Delay Time 1 & Exit Delay Time 2
4.2.2.1
Required
(programmable)
45 - 120 sec. (2 minutes) for full or auto
arming Shall not exceed 255 seconds
60 Seconds
60 Seconds
Silent on Exit (Disable Exit Progress
Annunication - ie: Silent Exit)
4.2.2.2
Allowed
Individual keypads may be disabled
All Audible Annunciators
All Audible
Annunciators
Exit Time Restart
4.2.2.3
Required Option
Only one restart during arming.
Enabled
Enabled
Auto Interior Off (Auto "Stay" Arm on
Unvacated Premises)
4.2.2.5
Required Option
(except for remote arm)
Away arm changes to Stay Arm
if there is no exit detected.
Enabled
Enabled
Entry Delay Time 1 & Entry Delay
Time 2
4.2.3.1
Required
(programmable)
30 sec. to at least 240 sec.
(4 minutes) minimum **
At least 30 Seconds **
30 Seconds
Comm Abort Time (Abort Window) for
Non-Fire Zones. 000 time = Disabled
4.2.5.1
Required Option
May be disabled - by zone or zone type
Enabled (all zones)
Enabled
Comm Abort Window Time - for NonFire Zones
4.2.5.1
Required
(programmable)
15 sec. - 45 sec. **
At least 15 seconds
30 Seconds
Abort Annunciation ***
4.2.5.1.2
Required
Annunciate that no alarm was transmitted
Enabled
Enabled - No
disable option
Cancel Annunciation ***
4.2.5.4.1
Required
Annunciate that a Cancel was transmitted
Enabled
Enabled - No
disable option
Duress (Individual User Code Option)
4.2.6.1
& 4.2.6.2
Allowed Option
Cannot be a 1+ or derivative of another
user. No duplicates with other user codes
Disabled
Disabled
Cross Zoned (Zone Option)
4.3.1
Required Option
Violation of a zone defined as Cross zone
requires verification by another zone
Enabled and two (or
more) zones programmed
Disabled
Cross Zone Verify Time
4.3.1
Allowed
Programmable from 1 to 255 seconds.
Time based on walk path
in protected premises
30 Seconds
Single Alarm Lockout (Swinger
Shutdown)
4.3.2
Required
(programmable)
For all non-fire zones,
shut down at 1 trip.
Enabled
Enabled
Fire Verified Zone Definitions (Fire
Alarm Verificatoin)
4.3.3
Required Option
Depends on Panel and Sensors
Enabled unless sensors
can self-verify
Disabled
4.5
Required
Call waiting cancel prefix code may be
dialed on initial attempt ONLY.
Depends on User Phone
Line
Blank - Not
Programmed
Call Waiting Cancel ***
* Programming at installation may be subordinate to other UL requirements for the intended application.
** Combined Entry Delay and Abort Window should not exceed 1 minute.
*** Feature is pre-defined in the panel software and may not be altered.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 65
Appendix F - Regulatory Agency Statements
FCC: This control complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front nameplate of the main control board is a label that contains, among other information, the
FCC certification number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This
equipment uses an RJ31X jack to connect to the telephone network. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN’s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. Typically, the sum of REN’s should not exceed five
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line (as determined by the total RENs) contact the local telephone company.
If this equipment should happen to cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service
may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to
file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary
modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty
information. Elk Products, Inc. 3266 Hwy 70 W. Hildebran, NC 28637 828-397-4200 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product. All necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC
registration on this product. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
This control complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. The FCC
requires the following statement for your information:
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
may cause Interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
* If using an indoor antenna, have a quality outdoor antenna installed.
* Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is induced or eliminated.
* Move the receiver away from the security control.
* Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the security control
* Have the security control plugged into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits.
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user or installer may find a booklet titled
“Interference Handbook” prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402. The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or Users Manual.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada IC: [ 4353A-M1GCB REN 0.3B ] This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The REN “Ringer Equivalence Number” is
an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination
of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS
The M1 has been evaluated to the following Standards:
UL Standard 985, Household Fire Warning System Units
UL Standard 1023, Household Burglar-Alarm System Units
UL Standard 1635, Digital Alarm Communicator System Units,
UL Standard 1637, Home Health Care Signaling Equipment
ULC/ORD C1023-74, Canadian Standard for Household Burglar Alarm System Units,
ULC S545-02, Canadian Standard for Residential Fire Warning System Control Units.
UL Standard 1610, Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units
UL Standard 365, Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL Standard 609, Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
ULC S303, Canadian Standard for Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
CAN/ULC-S304-06, Canadian Standard for Signal Receiving Centre and Premise Burglar Alarm Control Units.
CSA C22.2 No. 205-M1983 – Canadian Standard for Signal Equipment
MINIMUM SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS FOR UL INSTALLATIONS
Household Burglary (UL 1023), Household Fire (UL 985), Digital Alarm Communicator (UL 1635) Listed Installations
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
At least one compatible keypad is needed for all applications.
At least one bell fixture is required for all applications.
Household Burg requires 4 hours of standby power. Limit combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP, and
connector J16 to 1 Amp max. and use one (1) 8 Ah battery. A supplementary UL Listed, Battery Backed-up, Supervised Power Supply must
be connected to power additional Keypads and Expanders if the combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP,
and connector J16 exceeds 1 Amp.
Household Fire/Home Health Care requires 24 hours of standby power. Limit combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX,
+VAUX, +VKP, and connector J16 to 500 mA and use two (2) 8 Ah batteries in parallel.
Force Arming and Auto Arming shall not be enabled
For Household Fire Listed Installations the indicating devices shall be a Wheelock 34T-12 or equivalent.
Initiating and indicating devices must be rated at 11.5 to 12.4 VDC.
For Household applications the minimum alarm cutoff time for the audible devices shall be 5 minutes.
Zone Swinger Shutdown shall not be enabled.
Remote Downloading shall not be used on UL Listed systems.
Communicator Dial Delay time shall be set to “0”.
For Household Burg Listed Installations the maximum entry delay time shall be 45 seconds and the max. exit delay time shall be 120 seconds.
24-hour communicator test transmission is required.
The silent keypad option shall not be enabled.
The number of dial attempts must be set from 5 - 10.
Fail to communicate report code must be enabled.
Page 66
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix F - Regulatory Agency Statements (cont)
Home Health Care (UL 1637) Listed Installations
Requirements described under UL985 plus:
* A minimum of two (2) keypads are required with one keypad powered from “+VKP” and one keypad powered from “+VAUX”.
Commercial - Central Station (UL 1610), Police Station Connected (UL 365), Local Burglar Alarm (UL 609) Listed Installations
Requirements described under UL1023 plus:
* The Alarm Cutoff timer must be set to 00900 sec. (15 min.) or greater.
* UL Commercial Burg requires 4 hours of standby power. Limit combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP, and
connector J16 to 450 mA max. and use one (1) 8 Ah battery. A supplementary UL Listed, Battery Backed-up Power Supply must be
connected to power additional Keypads and Expanders if the combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX, +VKP, and
connector J16 exceeds 450 mA.
* An acceptable Commercial enclosure must be used (see Listed Enclosures below)
* A UL LIsted Tamper Switch(s) must be installed on the enclosure and connected to a 24 hour Burg Tamper defined Zone.
* All Keypads need to be installed within the protected area (they have no tamper)
* DO NOT USE an A B Attack Cabinet for the external sounder
* A Whenever/And/Then rule should be written (using ElkRP software) to enable the Output 2 Siren to ‘chirp’ upon closing ringback.
UL Canada Listed Installations (ULC S304 and ULC S303)
Requirements described under UL1023, 1610 plus:
* The Alarm Cutoff timer must be set to 00900 sec. (15 min.) or greater.
* UL Canada Commercial Burg requires 24 hours of standby power. Limit combined continuous current draw from terminals +SAUX, +VAUX,
+VKP, and connector J16 is 450 mA max. and use two (2) 8 Ah batteries in parallel.
* Zone Expanders must be in an acceptable Commercial enclosure (see Listed Enclosures below)
* Communications Channel Security Applications: Low Risk, Passive Level 1 (P1), Extent 1 (CAN/ULC-S302)
* For Phone Line Fault, the delay time setting must be for Max. 3 minutes.
* For System Report Codes and Options, the setting must be for Max. 90 seconds for reportiing changes in the status of the control unit,
including alarm, trouble, open and close signals.
LISTED ENCLOSURES:
For Household Burglar or Household Fire Listed Installations one of the following enclosures must be used:
*
*
*
*
ELK 14” Enclosure model ELK-SWB14 or ELK-UB14
ELK 28” Enclosure model ELK-SWB28
OnQ Legrand 14” Enclosure models 363474-01or 363474-11 utilizing the Universal Mounting plate part no. 364453. Not LISTED FOR CANADA
OnQ Legrand 28” Enclosure models 363475-01, 363475-11, 364591-01, 364591-02 or364591-11 utilizing the Universal Mounting plate part no.
364453. Not LISTED FOR CANADA
* OnQ Legrand 42” Enclosure models 363476-01,363476-11,364592-01, 364592-02, or 364592-11 utilizing the Universal Mounting plate part no.
364453. Not LISTED FOR CANADA
For Commercial Listed Installations the following enclosure must be used:
*
ELK-TB14 Tamper Resistant Enclosure
SUPPLEMENTARY POWER SUPPLY:
This diagram shows how to properly connect a Supplementary UL Listed, Battery Backed-up Power Supply when the
combined total current draw from the control is more than the allowable current as per the UL requirements.
ELK-M1
RS-485 DATA BUS
+VKP
DATA A
DATA B
NEG
RED
GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
UL Listed,
Battery Backed-up
Power Supply
AC AC
+ BAT -
Data Bus Devices e.g.
Keypads, Expanders
+ DC Connect Negatives of both
supplies together.
UL Listed, Class 2
Plug-in Transformer
as called out by the
Power Supply Mfg.
BLACK
GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
RED
Rechargeable
Stand-by Battery
**
Data Bus Devices e.g.
Keypads, Expanders
** The battery on the supplementary power supply will be supplying power during a power outage to the Data Bus Devices connected to it. The Power Supply and
backup Battery should be sized to supply the UL required minimum standby time according to the Data Bus Devices e.g. Keypads, Expanders connected.
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 67
Appendix F - Regulatory Agency Statements (cont)
NOTE: A recent revision to UL985 requires that a minimum 1/4” separation be provided and
maintained between power-limited conductors and non-power-limited conductors.
Because the Battery conductor leads are non-power-limited, we recommend they be
routed in the shortest and most direct path from the Control to the Battery itself, regardless
of the enclosure type of brand. For 28” or larger enclosures, a battery shelf (e.g. ELKSWS) may be necessary. Under no circumstances should any “power-limited” conductors
be routed within 1/4” of the non-power-limited battery leads. The best procedure is to
avoid the shaded “KEEP OUT” area entirely, as depicted in these diagrams.
† Not evaluated by UL
Page 68
M1G Installation and Programming
Appendix G - Additional ELK-M1KP Keypad Information
OPTIONAL PROX CARD READER †
Prox cards/fobs are enrolled into a User Code location using the same procedures used to add/change User Code PINs.
1. Press the ELK key, then press the 6 key (or scroll up) to display 6 - Change User Codes. Press the RIGHT arrow key to
select this menu. A Master user code (PIN) must be entered to gain access to this menu.
2. Enter the three digit number of the desired User Code location (001 to 099) or use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the codes. Then select CHG by pressing the RIGHT arrow key.
3. The keypad will display any existing 4 or 6 digit code that is programmed for this user along with any programmed name.
4. Place a new (not previously enrolled) prox card/fob near the Keypad's right speaker grill below the Stay key. The read range
is approximately 1/8" to 3/8". The Keypad should beep 3 times and display the card/fob 12 digit ID.
5. If the card/fob is rejected, a low error tone and Code Not Authorized, Redo will display. Causes for reject include: A. The
card/fob has already been enrolled (duplicate codes are not allowed) OR B. The facility code in the card/fob does not
match the reader facility code. A prox reader can only read cards/fobs with a matching facility code.
6. Once a prox card/fob is enrolled in a user code location, its capabilities are set by the User Code Options found in Installer
Menu 02. The commonly used options are: Arm the Control, Disarm the Control, or Access event.
A keypad access event occurs when a valid prox card/fob is read at a keypad. Nothing will happen until this event is utilized in
a Whenever/And/Then Rule from the Elk-RP software. An Access event can be used to create virtually any desired reaction.
i.e., turn on an output, a light, close/open a relay, etc. The following rule example turns on Output 003 for 10 seconds when a
valid prox card/fob (with Access Option enabled) is read at Keypad 01. This could be used to break power to a door strike.
WHENEVER Keypad 01 Access is Activated
THEN Turn On Output 003 for 10 seconds.
M1KP KEYPAD ON-BOARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR †
The ELK-M1KP Keypad has an on-board temperature sensor. (NOTE: The ELK-M1KP2 & M1KPAS devices DO NOT HAVE an
on-board temp sensor.) The temperature may be displayed and/or used with the Elk-RP Whenever/And/Then Rules to cause
an action or control something. i.e., a fan, pump, light, etc.
Using a Keypad temperature reading in an ELK-RP Whenever/And/Then Rule to create an action or output
The following rule example will turn on Output 3 for 10 minutes when the Keypad temperature reading exceeds 90 degrees.
1. Start RP and open an account. Click the Automation tab and the Rules tab followed by New.
2. Click Trigger, then point to Time Occurrence, then Every X Seconds, and then click to select. **
3. In the block beside the words Fixed Value, type in 30 and click OK.
4. Click And, follwed by Temperature which is located near the bottom of the drop down list.
5. Highlight the Keypad temperature sensor (by name), click the Greater than button, and change the temperature selection
number to 90. Make sure the button beside F is selected, and click OK.
6. Click Then, followed by Turn Output On/Off. Highlight Output 3 (use the scroll down arrow), make sure the button beside
Turn on is selected, then select the box labeled For. Highlight the hrs:mins:secs window and enter 00:10:00 (10 minutes). Click OK. Double check everything and click Done.
** Numerous WHENEVERS may be used for a temperature rule, i.e., time occurence, arming of the system, etc. but NOT a direct temperature
change or reading. However, you can use a AND command to compare or "test" a temperature reading against a target value each time the
trigger occurs. The target compare options are "Equal to, Not equal to, Less than, and Greater than". The "Equal to" is not recommended as a
compare opton because it may be impossible for a temperature reading to be exactly at the target value when the trigger occurs.
M1KP Temp Sensor Calibration - It may be necessary to re-calibrate the temp sensor for certain locations.
1. Press and hold the " * " key, followed by the F5 key ** . HOLD BOTH keys pressed for 5-10 secs or until the LCD displays
Exit when done. F1 Set Addr. (This is Keypad setup mode)
** Alternate Method: Hold any key pressed while applying power to the keypad.
2. Press the F2 key and the LCD will display: Temperature Degrees F = XX.X (This is the current temperature)
3. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to adjust the temp display until it approximates the desired setting. Each press changes
the setting by approximately 3 tenths of a degree (00.3)
4. Press the Exit key twice do return back to the regular operation mode.
† Not evaluated by UL
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 69
M1 LIMITED WARRANTY
The ELK-M1 and its associated component products are warranted by Elk Products, Inc. (“Manufacturer”) against defects in
material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of manufacture. If product is found to be defective during
the first 180 days, manufacturer may allow an over the counter exchange, subject to inspection and approval by one of it’s
representatives. Manufacturer’s obligations under this Limited Warranty shall be limited to repairing or replacing, at its option,
free of charge, during this warranty period, any product returned to Manufacturer freight prepaid. After the expiration of the
warranty period, product will be repaired based on a fixed charge per device.
Manufacturer shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if (1) the Product has been damaged by
negligence, accident, mishandling, lightning or flood, or other Acts of God, (2) the Product has not been operated in
accordance with its operating instructions, (3) the Product has been altered or repaired by anyone outside Manufacturer’s
authorized facilities (4) adaptations or accessories have been made or attached to the Product which, in Manufacturer’s sole
determination, have adversely affected its performance, safety or reliability.
If a Product should malfunction or fail during it’s warranty period, contact ELK or one of its authorized distributors for a Return
Authorization (RMA) number. Returned Products must include a complete description of the problem, along with the RA
number clearly marked on outside of the package. Manufacturer will not be responsible for any unnecessary items included
with any returned Product.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR ANY PRODUCT. MANUFACTURER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OF MERCHANTABILITY. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN TORT, INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY, AND SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY AT ALL FOR INJURY TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY.
MANUFACTURER’S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE TO FULFILL ITS OBLIGATION UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR ANY
OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH A PRODUCT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE
RECEIVED BY MANUFACTURER FOR THE PRODUCT. THE REMEDIES STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE THE
CUSTOMER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST MANUFACTURER REGARDING ANY PRODUCT. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MANUFACTURER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS AND REVENUES, INCONVENIENCE OR INTERRUPTIONS IN OPERATIONS, OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND. THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS ARE NOT MADE BY
MANUFACTURER WHERE PROHIBITED BY LAW. SOME STATES PROHIBIT LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTIES AND THE
CUSTOMER MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL RIGHTS IN THOSE STATES.
Page 70
M1G Installation and Programming
Index
A
I
S
Alarm Abort 40
Alarm Cutoff Timers 33
Anti-Takeover 21
Area Partitioning 21
Area Reporting Codes 40, 41
Auto Stay Option 27
Automation control function 16
Automation Tasks 51
Auxiliary Power Connections 10
Input/Output Expander Addresses 24
Installation and Wiring 8
Installer Program Code
14, 16, 21, 22, 25
Serial Port Baud Rate 37
SIA CP-01 Compliance - Appendix E 65
Silent Alarm 31
SingleAlmLockout 37
Specifications, Features, and Benefits 5
Sunrise/Sunset 52
SwingerShutdown 33
Sys Rpt Code Options 44, 45
B
L
Battery Connection 10
Bus Module Enrollment 25
Lighting 52
Listen-In 33
C
M
Canada IC 66
Central Station alarm verification 36
Clock, Setting System Time 16
Communicator Setup Checklist 22
Comparisons of M1 and M1G (Gold) 5
Counters 53
CrossZonePool 33
CrossZoneVerTime 35
Custom Settings 53
Custom voice messages
Voice message recording 19
Menu 01 - Bus ModuleEnrollment 25
Menu 02 - User Code Authorities 25
Menu 03 - Area Definitions 27
Menu 04 - Keypad Definitions 28
Menu 05 - Zone Definitions 30
Menu 06 - Alarm Cutoff Timers 33
Menu 07 - Global System Definitions 34
Menu 08 - Telephone Account Setup 38
Menu 09 - Area Reporting Codes 40
Menu 10 - Zone Reporting Codes 42
Menu 11 - Sys Report Code Options &
Codes 43, 44
Menu 12 - User Report Codes 47
Multi-area (Partition) Operation 20
D
Data Bus Device Types/Addresses 24
Daylight Savings Time 35
Defaulting the Control 36
Dialer Delay 33
Dialer Delay Time 41
Duress 24
K
Keypad Addresses 24
Keypad Definitions 29
Keypad Menus 16
Update/Verify Firmware 50, 51
User Code 14, 16
User Code Options 24
V
Verify Call Time 37
Voice messages - Recording Custom 19
Volume level adjustment 35
Operating The System 14
Output 1 Delay Turn-On 36
Outputs 11, 52
Whenever/And/Then 55
WirelessDefinitions 47
Wiring & Hookup Diagram 6
WrongCodeLockout 35
Entering Installer Level Programming 22
Entry delay time 26
Event Codes - Appendix A 58
Exit delay time 26
Exit Error 26
Exit TimeRestart 27
Exit1TimeRestart 27
PeriodicTrip 33
G
U
W
P
FCC Information 66
Force Arm 32
Four (4) State Zone Wiring 9
Tasks 51
Telephone Account Setup 38, 39
Telephone Line Connection 11
Telephone Remote Control 34, 60
Temporary Code 24
Texts 54
Thermostats 54
Transformer Power Input (AC) 10
Two Way Listen-in 36
O
E
F
T
Q
Quick Reference Programming Guide 23
Quickarm 26
Z
Zone Definitions 31, 32
Zone Reporting Codes 42, 43
Zone Wiring Types 31
R
Regulatory Agency Statements Appendix F 66, 67, 68
Ring/Hang/Answer option 36
Rings Until Auto Answer 37
RP Software 49
Rules 55
Global Sys Definitions 34, 35, 36, 37
M1G Installation and Programming
Page 71
www.elkproducts.com
Printed in USA
Download PDF